Project Gutenberg's Appletons' Popular Science Monthly,, by Various

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org


Title: Appletons' Popular Science Monthly,
       Volume 54,  November 1898

Author: Various

Editor: William Jay Youmans

Release Date: October 15, 2013 [EBook #43957]

Language: English

Character set encoding: UTF-8

*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK APPLETONS' POPULAR SCIENCE ***




Produced by Marc-André Seekamp, Greg Bergquist and the
Online Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
(This file was produced from images generously made
available by Biodiversity Heritage Library.)









  Established by Edward L. Youmans

              APPLETONS'
           POPULAR SCIENCE
               MONTHLY

              EDITED BY
         WILLIAM JAY YOUMANS

              VOL. LIV

    NOVEMBER, 1898, TO APRIL, 1899

              NEW YORK
       D. APPLETON AND COMPANY
                1899




          COPYRIGHT, 1899,
     BY D. APPLETON AND COMPANY.




VOL. LIV.    ESTABLISHED BY EDWARD L. YOUMANS.    NO. 1.

APPLETONS' POPULAR SCIENCE MONTHLY.

NOVEMBER, 1898.

_EDITED BY WILLIAM JAY YOUMANS._




CONTENTS.


                                                                   PAGE

       I. Was Middle America Peopled from Asia? By Prof. E. S.
            MORSE.                                                    1

      II. The Possible Fiber Industries of the United States. By
            CHARLES RICHARDS DODGE. (Illustrated.)                   15

     III. What is Social Evolution? By HERBERT SPENCER.              35

      IV. The Torrents of Switzerland. By EDGAR R. DAWSON, M. E.     46

       V. The Evolution of Colonies. V. Political Evolution.
            By J. COLLIER.                                           52

      VI. Architectural Forms in Nature. By F. S. DELLENBAUGH.
           (Illus.)                                                  63

     VII. The Herds of the Yellow Ant. By JAMES WEIR, Jr., M. D.
           (Illus.)                                                  75

    VIII. Two Gifts to French Science. By M. HENRI DE PARVILLE.
          (Illus.)                                                   81

      IX. The Mongoose in Jamaica. By C. W. WILLIS. (Illustrated.)   86

       X. The Cause of Rain. By J. R. PLUMANDON.                     89

      XI. Dream and Reality. By M. CAMILLE MELINAND.                 96

     XII. A Practical Dutch Charity. By Prof. J. HOWARD GORE.       103

    XIII. Sketch of Frank Wigglesworth Clarke. (With Portrait.)     110

     XIV. Correspondence: The Moon and the Weather.                 118

      XV. Editor's Table: The Goal of Education.--A Doubtful
          Appendix to Science.--The Cause of Spain's
          Decadence.--Dream and Reality.                            118

     XVI. Scientific Literature.                                    126

    XVII. Fragments of Science.                                     135


                  NEW YORK:
           D. APPLETON AND COMPANY,
               72 FIFTH AVENUE.

     SINGLE NUMBER, 50 CENTS.      YEARLY SUBSCRIPTION, $5.00.

     COPYRIGHT, 1898, BY D. APPLETON AND COMPANY.

Entered at the Post Office at New York, and admitted for transmission
through the mails at second-class rates.




[Illustration: FRANK WIGGLESWORTH CLARKE.]




APPLETONS' POPULAR SCIENCE MONTHLY.

NOVEMBER, 1898.




WAS MIDDLE AMERICA PEOPLED FROM ASIA?

BY PROF. EDWARD S. MORSE.


The controversies over the question of the origin of Central American
culture are to be again awakened by the exploration organized under
the direction of the American Museum of Natural History through the
liberality of its president, Morris K. Jesup, Esq. The plans embrace an
ethnographic survey of the races between the Columbia and Amoor Rivers.
Many similarities in customs, folklore, etc., will doubtless be found
among these northern races. How far traces of an ancient avenue will
be established through which came the unique cult of middle America,
and for which in a way the surveys have been instituted, remains to be
seen. The question is one of perennial interest, and all honor to the
scientific spirit of Mr. Jesup, whose munificence has provided the means
for this work.

It may be of interest to remind those who have only a vague idea of the
contention that there are many earnest scholars who insist that the
wonderful architectural remains in Mexico, Yucatan, and other regions
of the west coast are due to Asiatic contact in the past. As proofs of
this contact are cited similarities as seen in the monuments, the facial
characteristics of certain tribes, ancient customs, astronomical ideas,
serpent worship, certain games, etc. Particularly is it believed by the
scholars that the "land of Fusang" mentioned in early Chinese historical
records is no other than Mexico or some contiguous country.

Space will not permit even the briefest mention of the evidences
which have led to these conclusions, and the reader is referred to a
remarkably condensed history of the whole question embodied in a volume
by Mr. Edward P. Vining entitled An Inglorious Columbus. Under this
unfortunate title one may find the most painstaking collocation of the
many memoirs written upon this subject, with the Chinese account of the
land of Fusang in Chinese characters, and appended thereto the various
translations of the document by De Guines, Williams, Julien, and other
eminent sinologues.

To the French Orientalist, M. de Guines, we are indebted for our first
knowledge of certain ancient records of the Chinese, which briefly
record the visit of Chinese Buddhist monks to the land of Fusang in the
year 458 of our era, and the return of a single Buddhist monk from this
land in 499. De Guines's memoir appeared in 1761, and for forty years
but little attention was drawn to it. Humboldt says that, according to
the learned researches of Father Gaubil, it appears doubtful whether the
Chinese ever visited the western coast of America at the time stated by
De Guines. In 1831, Klaproth, the eminent German Orientalist, combated
the idea that Fusang was Mexico, and insisted that it was Japan. In
1844 the Chevalier de Paravey argued that Fusang should be looked for
in America. Prof. Karl Friedrich Neumann also defended this idea. In
magazine articles in 1850-1862, and finally in book form in 1875, Mr.
C. G. Leland supported with great ingenuity the idea of Chinese contact
based on the Fusang account. In 1862 M. José Perez also defended
the idea. In 1865 M. Gustave d'Eichthal published his memoir on the
Buddhistic origin of American civilization, and in the same year M.
Vivien de Saint-Martin combated the theory, and since that time many
others have written upon the subject in favor or in opposition to the
idea of Asiatic contact.

These hasty citations are only a few of the many that I have drawn from
Mr. Vining's encyclopedic compilation.

It is extraordinary what a keen fascination the obscure paths of regions
beyond history and usually beyond verification have to many minds, and
the fascination is as justifiable as the desire to explore unknown
regions of the earth. In the one case, however, we have a tangled mass
of legendary tales coming down from a time when dragons were supposed to
exist, when trees were miles in height, when people lived to a thousand
years, when every unit of measurement was distorted and every physical
truth, as we know it to-day, had no recognition, while in the other case
we have at least a continuity of the same land and sea extending to the
unexplored beyond. This impulse of the human mind finds an attractive
problem in the question as to the origin of the American races. Dr.
Brinton has insisted on the unreasonable nature of the inquiry by
asking an analogous one: "Whence came the African negroes? All will
reply, 'From Africa, of course.' 'Originally?' 'Yes, originally; they
constitute the African or negro subspecies of man.'" By bringing
together isolated features which have resemblances in common, the
American Indian has been traced to nearly every known stock. Mr. Henry
W. Henshaw, in an admirable address entitled Who are the American
Indians? says: "If you have special bias or predilection you have only
to choose for yourself. If there be any among you who decline to find
the ancestors of our Indians among the Jews, Phœnicians, Scandinavians,
Irish, Welsh, Egyptians, or Tartars, then you still have a choice among
the Hindu, Malay, Polynesian, Chinese, or Japanese, or indeed among
almost any other of the children of men." Had this address been written
a few years later he might have added Hittite!

There are two propositions involved in the controversy as to the Asiatic
origin of the American race: the one is that America was peopled from
Asia by invasions or migrations in pre-savage or pre-glacial times; the
other is that the peculiar civilization of Central America was induced
by Buddhist monks, who traveled from Asia to Mexico and Central America
in the fifth century of our era. Those who sustain the first thesis are
without exception men trained in the science of anthropology; those
who sustain the second thesis are with a few conspicuous exceptions
travelers, geographers, sinologues, missionaries, and the like.

If Asia should ever prove to be the cradle of the human race, or of
any portion of it which had advanced well beyond the creature known as
_Pithecanthropus erectus_, then unquestionably an Asian people may be
accounted the progenitors of the American Indians. Any effort, however,
to establish an identity at this stage would probably take us far beyond
the origin of speech or the ability to fabricate an implement.

The controversy has not raged on this ground, however; the numerous
volumes and memoirs on the subject have dealt almost exclusively with
culture contacts or direct invasions from Asia in our era, and more
particularly with the supposed visits of Chinese Buddhist monks to
Mexico and Central America already alluded to. Believing in the unity
of the human race, the dispersion of the species seems more naturally
to have occurred along the northern borders of the great continents
rather than across the wide ocean. From the naturalist's standpoint the
avenues have been quite as open for the circumpolar distribution of man
as they have been for the circumpolar distribution of other animals
and plants down to the minutest land snail and low fungus. The ethnic
resemblances supposed to exist between the peoples of the two sides of
the Pacific may be the result of an ancient distribution around the
northern regions of the globe. Even to-day social relations are said
to exist between the peoples of the Mackenzie and the Lena delta,
and it is not improbable that the carrying band of the Ainu in Yeso
and a similar device depicted on ancient codices and stone monuments
in Mexico may have had a common origin. Advancing to a time when man
acquired the art of recording his thoughts, the question of any contact
between the peoples of the eastern and western shores of the Pacific,
south of latitude 40°, compels us to examine the avenues which have
been so potent in the distribution of life in the past--namely, the
oceanic currents. We are at once led to the great Japan current, the
Kuro Shiwo, which sweeps up by the coast of Japan and spends its force
on the northwest coast of America. Records show a number of instances
of Japanese junks cast ashore on the Oregon coast and shores to the
north.[1]

It must be evidences of Japanese and not Chinese contact that we are
to look for--tangible evidences, for example, in the form of relics,
methods of burial, etc. That the Japanese bear resemblances to certain
northern people there can be no doubt. Dr. Torell brought before
the Swedish Anthropological Society, some years ago, the results
of a comparative study of Eskimo and Japanese. The anatomical and
ethnographical resemblances appeared so striking to him as to give
additional strength to the theory of the settlement of America from
Asia by way of Bering Strait. That there are certain resemblances
among individuals of different races we have abundant evidences. At a
reception in Philadelphia I introduced a Japanese commissioner (who had
been a Cambridge wrangler) to a full-blooded Omaha Indian dressed in our
costume, and the commissioner began a conversation with him in Japanese;
nor could he believe me when I assured him that it was an Indian that
he was addressing, and not one of his own countrymen. I was told by an
_attaché_ of the Japanese legation at Washington that after carefully
scrutinizing the features of a gentleman with whom he was traveling he
ventured to introduce himself as a fellow-countryman, and found to his
astonishment that the man was a native of the Malay Peninsula. That
the Malays bear a strong resemblance to the Chinese is quite true. Dr.
Baelz, of the Medical College of Japan, can find no differences between
the crania and pelves of the Chinese and Malays. Wallace assures us
that even the Malay of Java, when dressed as a Chinese, is not to be
distinguished from them, and Peschel classifies the Malays with the
Mongoloid people. In these approximate regions one might expect close
intermixtures. If resemblances are established between the Japanese and
the Eskimo, they would probably have arisen from a circumpolar race
which has left its traces on northern peoples the world around. We turn
naturally to Japan as the region from which a migration might reasonably
have been supposed to take place. Its position on the Asiatic coast
with a series of larger and smaller stepping-stones--the Kuriles--to
Kamchatka, and thence across the strait to America and seaward, the
broad and powerful Japanese current sweeping by its coast and across
the Pacific, arrested only by the northwestern coast of America. With
these various avenues of approach one might certainly expect evidences
of contact in past times. A somewhat extended study in Japan of its
prehistoric and early historic remains in the way of shell-heap pottery
from the north to the south, much of it of an exceedingly curious
character; the later stone implements, many of them of the most
extraordinary types; the bronze mirrors, swords, spear points, and the
so-called bronze bells; the wide distribution of a curious comma-shaped
ornament of stone known as the _magatama_, with a number of varieties,
and many other kinds of objects, leads me to say that no counterpart
or even remote parallelism has been found in the western hemisphere.
Certain rude forms of decoration of the northern shell-heap pottery of
Japan, such as the cord-mark and crenulated fillet, are world-wide in
their distribution, and a similar wide dispersal is seen of the rude
stone implements and notched and barbed bone and horn. Here, however,
the similarity ends. The lathe-turned unglazed mortuary vessels so
common in ancient graves in Japan and Korea have equally no counterpart
on our western coast. If now we examine the early records of Japan in
her two famous works--the Kojiki and Nihonji, which contain rituals,
ceremonies, and historical data going back with considerable accuracy to
the third and fourth centuries of our era--we shall find many curious
details of customs and arts and references to objects which have since
been exhumed from burial mounds, yet we look in vain for a similar cult
in Mexico or Central America. Turning aside from Japan as an impossible
ground in which to trace resemblances, we glance at the unique character
of the ancient pottery of Central America, with its representations
of natural forms, such as fishes, turtles, frogs, shells, etc., its
peculiar motives of decoration in color, and find no counterpart in
Asia. The pyramidal rock structure and rounded burial mounds are
supposed to have their counterparts in the East, but the pyramidal form
is common in various parts of the world, simply because it is the most
economical and most enduring type of architecture, and facilitates by
its form the erection of the highest stone structures. The rounding dome
of an earth mound and the angular side of a rock pyramid are the result
of material only.

If we now turn to China as a possible region from which migrations may
have come in the past, we have only to study the historical records
of that ancient people to realize how hopeless it is to establish
any relationship. Let one study the Ceremonial Usages of the Chinese
(1121 B.C.--translated by Gingell), and he will then appreciate the
wonderful advancement of the Chinese at that early date--the organized
government, the arts, customs, manufactures, and the minute observances
and regulations concerning every detail of life. With these records
before him he may search in vain for the direct introduction of any art
or device described in this old Chinese work. A few similarities are
certainly found between the East and the West, but these arise from the
identity in man's mental and physical structure. With two legs only,
for example, it is found difficult to sit on a seat comfortably in more
than a few ways. One may sit with both legs down, with one leg under,
with legs crossed _à la_ Turk, or the unconventional way throughout
the world with one leg over the other at various angles. It would seem
with this limited number of adjustments that any similarities in the
attitude of certain stone statues in America and Asia could have but
little weight. Prof. F. W. Putnam believes that he has established an
Asiatic origin of certain jade ornaments found in Central America. If
this conclusion could be sustained, we should then have evidences of
contact with an Asiatic people in the stone age, which in itself was
one of great antiquity for the Chinese, and one long antedating the
origin of Buddhism. In the Chinese work above alluded to the whetstone
is mentioned for sharpening swords, and the craft employed in polishing
the musical stone. Confucius also refers to the musical stone in his
Analects. This is as near as we get to the use of stone eleven hundred
years before Christ. It is to the merit of Putnam to have first called
attention to the fact that many of the jade ornaments, amulets, etc.,
of Central America had originally been portions of jade celts. The
discovery is one of importance, whatever explanation may be reached as
to the origin of the stone. In Costa Rica these celt-derived ornaments
have been cut from celts composed of the native rock, and it would
seem that these old implements handed down in the family led to their
being preserved in the form of beads, amulets, etc., much in the same
spirit that animates us to-day in making paper-cutters, penholders, and
the like from wood of the Charter Oak, frigate Constitution, and other
venerated relics. Among other evidences of contact the existence of the
Chinese calendar in Mexico is cited. Dr. Brinton shows, however, that
the Mexican calendar is an indigenous production, and has no relation
to the calendar of the Chinese. In a similar way the Mexican game of
_patolli_ is correlated with the East Indian game of _parchesi_ by Dr.
E. B. Tylor. Dr. Stewart Culin, who has made a profound study of the
games of the world, and Mr. Frank Hamilton Cushing, the distinguished
student of the ethnology of southern North America, are both convinced
that this game had an independent origin in various parts of the world.
Mexican divisions of time marked by five colors are recognized as being
allied to a similar device in China. The application of colors to the
meaning of certain ideographs is common in other parts of the world as
well. It is important to remark that the colors named include nearly the
whole category as selected by barbarous people, and in the use of colors
in this way it would be difficult to avoid similarities.

The evidences of contact in early times must be settled by the
comparison of early relics of the two shores of the Pacific.
Resemblances there are, and none will dispute them, but that they are
fortuitous and have no value in the discussion is unquestionable. As
illustrations of these fortuitous resemblances may be cited a tazza from
the United States of Colombia having a high support with triangular
perforations identical in form with that of a similar object found
among the mortuary vessels of Korea, and Greece as well. A curious,
three-lobed knob of a pot rim, so common in the shell mounds of Omori,
Japan, has its exact counterpart in the shell mounds of the upper
Amazon. In the Omori pottery a peculiar curtain-shaped decoration on a
special form of jar has its exact parallel in the ancient pottery of
Porto Rico. These instances might be multiplied, but such coincidences
as are often seen in the identity of certain words are familiar to all
students. The account of the land of Fusang appears in the records of
the Liang dynasty contained in the Nanshi, or History of the South,
written by Li Yen-Shau, who lived in the beginning of the seventh
century. It purports to have been told by a monk who returned from
the land of Fusang in 499 of our era. This hypothetical region has
been believed to be Japan, Saghalin, and Mexico. The record is filled
with fabulous statements of impossible animals, trees of impossible
dimensions, and is so utterly beyond credence in many ways that it
should have no weight as evidence. If it had any foundation in fact,
then one might infer that some traveler had entered Saghalin from the
north, had crossed to Yeso and Japan, and found his way back to China.
His own recollections, supplemented by stories told him by others,
would form the substance of his account. The record is brief, but any
one familiar with Japan as Klaproth was is persuaded with him that
the account refers to Japan and adjacent regions. The twenty thousand
_li_ the monk is said to have traveled may parallel his mulberry trees
several thousand feet high and his silkworms seven feet long. In a
more remote Chinese record, as mentioned by Dr. Gustave Schlegel, the
statement is made that the inhabitants had to dig down ten thousand feet
to obtain blue tenacious clay for roofing tiles! A number of ardent
writers convinced that signs of Chinese contact are seen in the relics
of middle America have seized upon this account of Fusang in support of
this belief. These convictions have arisen by finding it difficult to
believe that the ancient civilizations of Mexico and Peru could have
been indigenous. In seeking for an exterior origin in the Fusang account
overweight has been credited to every possible resemblance, and all
discrepancies have been ignored.

The fabulous account of the land of Fusang evidently supplied
documentary evidence, and Mexico was conceived to be the mythical
Fusang. Mr. Vining goes so far as to declare that "some time in the past
the nations of Mexico, Yucatan, and Central America were powerfully
affected by the introduction of Asiatic arts, customs, and religious
belief." To establish the details in the Chinese account the entire
western hemisphere is laid under contribution: now it is the buffalo
of North America, then the llama of Peru, the reindeer of the arctic,
or some native word. These writers do not hesitate to bring to life
animals that became extinct in the upper Tertiaries, and to account for
the absence of others by supposing them to have become extinct. Literal
statements of horses dragging wheeled vehicles are interpreted as an
allusion in Buddhist cult which refers by metaphor to attributes and not
to actual objects. As an illustration of the wild way in which some of
these resemblances are established, Mr. Vining quotes the account of M.
José Perez (_Revue Orientale et Américaine_, vol. viii). Perez reminds
us that the inhabitants of the New World gave Old World names to places
in the new continent, citing New York, New Orleans, and New Brunswick as
examples, and then says that at some remote epoch the Asiatics had given
to the cities of the New World the same names as the cities of their
mother country; so the name of the famous Japanese city Ohosaka (Osaka),
to the west of the Pacific, became Oaxaca in Mexico on the eastern side.
Now it is well known that the ancient name of Osaka was Namihawa; this
became corrupted into Naniwa, and not till 1492 does the name Osaka
appear. Rev. J. Summers gives a full account of these successive names
with their meanings (Transactions of the Asiatic Society of Japan,
vol. vii, part iv). The real question to be answered is not what might
have been accomplished by ancient explorers from Asia, but what was
accomplished. It is shown that Chinese Buddhist priests went to India
in the years 388, 399, 629, and so on, and the question is asked, Why
may they not have reached Mexico on the east? Migration on parallels of
latitude with no intervening ocean is one matter; to go from latitude
30° on one side of the Pacific almost to the Arctic Ocean, and down on
the other side nearly to the equator, is quite another exploit. It is
assumed that five priests had gone to Mexico in 468 A.D., and there
ingrafted Buddhistic cult on the races with whom they came in contact.
It is simply beyond reason to believe that the introduction of Buddhism
into Mexico antedated by half a century its introduction into Japan.
Communication between Korea and Japan has been from the earliest times
one without effort or peril: in the one case a trip of a day or more,
in the other case a journey of unnumbered thousands of miles through
perilous seas, across stormy fiords and raging waters, including arctic
and tropical climates and contact with multitudinous savage hordes.
Those who hold that Mexico and Central America were powerfully affected
by Asiatic contact must be called upon to explain the absence of
certain Asiatic arts and customs which would have been introduced by
any contact of sufficient magnitude to leave its impress so strongly
in other directions. A savage people takes but little from a civilized
people save its diseases, gunpowder, and rum. The contact of barbarous
with civilized people results in an interchange of many useful objects
and ideas, but these introductions must be through repeated invasions
and by considerable numbers. Peschel, while believing in the Asiatic
origin of the American race, would place the time far back in the savage
state. He repudiates the Fusang idea, and expresses his belief that "a
high state of civilization can not be transmitted by a few individuals,
and that the progress in culture takes place in dense populations and
by means of a division of labor which fits each individual into a
highly complex but most effective organization," and then insists that
"the phenomena of American civilization originated independently and
spontaneously"; and Keane shows how interesting the social, religious,
and political institutions of America become when "once severed from the
fictitious Asiatic connection and influences." That the savage derives
little or derives slowly from contact with a superior race is seen in
the fact that he still remains savage. Thus the Ainu, a low, savage
people, though they have been in contact with the Japanese for nearly
two thousand years, have never acquired the more powerful Mongolian
arrow release, while the Persians, though Aryan, yet early acquired
this release from their Mongolian neighbors. The Scandinavians, who in
prehistoric times practiced the primary release, yet later acquired
the more efficient Mediterranean method. Let us for a moment consider
what would have occurred as a result of an Asiatic contact with a
people advanced enough to have been powerfully affected in their "arts,
customs, and religious belief." It seems reasonable to believe that
traces of a Mongolian release would be found in Central America, the
more so as a warlike people would eagerly seize upon a more powerful
method of pulling the bow, yet no trace of a stone or metal thumb ring
has ever been found in the western hemisphere. Ancient Mexican codices,
while depicting the archer, reveal no trace of the Mongolian method. In
the Old World this release crept westward as a result of the migration
of, or contact with, Asiatic tribes, and metal thumb rings are dug up
on the Mediterranean littoral. While the arrow release of China might
not have effected a lodgment in America, the terra-cotta roofing tile
certainly would. This important device, according to Schlegel, was
probably known in China 2200 B.C., in Korea 500 B.C., and in Japan in
the early years of our era. In the ancient records of Japan reference
is made to "breaking a hole in the roof tiles of the hall," etc., and
green-glazed tiles are dug up on the sites of ancient temples in Japan.
The fragments are not only unmistakable but indestructible. I have shown
elsewhere[2] that the primitive roofing tile crept into Europe from
the East, distributing itself along both shores of the Mediterranean,
and extending north to latitude 44°. Graeber finds its earliest use in
the temple of Hira in Olympia, 1000 B.C. The ancient Greeks had no
knowledge of the roofing tile. Among the thousands of fragments and
multitudinous articles of pottery found by Schliemann in the ruins of
Ilios, not a trace of the roofing tile was discovered. One is forced
to believe that so useful an object, and one so easily made, would
have been immediately adopted by a people so skillful in the making of
pottery as the ancient Mexicans. Certainly these people and those of
contiguous countries were equal to the ancient Greeks in the variety
of their fictile products. Huge jars, whistles, masks, men in armor,
curious pots of an infinite variety attest to their skill as potters,
yet the western hemisphere has not revealed a single fragment of a
pre-Columbian roofing tile. Vining, in his work, cites an observation
of the Rev. W. Lobscheid, the author of a Chinese grammar. In crossing
the Isthmus of Panama this writer was much struck with the similarities
to China; "the principal edifices on elevated ground and the roofing
tiles identical to those of China." The roofing tile is indeed identical
with that of China. It is the form that I have elsewhere defined as the
normal or Asiatic tile, but it reached America for the first time by way
of the Mediterranean and Spain, and thence with the Spaniards across the
Atlantic, where it immediately gained a footing, and rapidly spread
through South America and along the west coast north, as may be seen in
the old mission buildings in California.

In China, Korea, and Japan the sandal has a bifurcated toe cord, the
base of which, springing from the front of the sandal, passes between
the first and second toes. It belongs to the Old World through its
entire extent. It is the only form represented in ancient Egyptian,
Assyrian, and Greek sculpture. One would have expected that with any
close contact with Asian people this method of holding the sandal to
the foot would have been established in Central America, yet one may
seek in vain for the evidences of even a sporadic introduction of this
method. Where representations are given in the sculptured stone pottery,
or codex, the sandal is represented with two cords, one passing between
the first and second and the other between the third and fourth toes.
Dr. Otis T. Mason, who has given us an exhaustive monograph of the foot
gear of the world, says that every authority on Mexico and Central
America pictures the sandal with two cords, and he further says, in a
general article on the same subject, "An examination of any collection
of pottery of middle America reveals the fact at once, if the human foot
is portrayed, that the single toe string was not anciently known."

The Thibetans, Chinese, Koreans, and Japanese have used the serviceable
carrying stick from time immemorial. The nearest approach to this method
in this country is seen in Guadalajara, where a shoulder piece is used
to carry jars. The representation of this method shows that the pole
rests across the back in such a manner that the load is steadied by both
the right and left hand simultaneously--identical, in fact, with methods
in vogue to-day through western Europe. We find, however, the northern
races, as the Ainu and Kamchadels, use the head band in carrying loads,
and this method has been depicted in ancient American sculpture. The
carrying stick, so peculiarly Asiatic, according to Dr. Mason, is not
met with on this continent.

With the evidences of Asiatic contact supposed to be so strong in
Central America, one might have imagined that so useful a device as
the simple chopsticks would have secured a footing. These two sticks,
held in one hand and known in China as "hasteners or nimble lads," are
certainly the most useful, the most economical, and the most efficient
device for their purposes ever invented by man. Throughout that vast
Asian region, embracing a population of five hundred million, the
chopstick is used as a substitute for fork, tongs, and certain forms of
tweezers. Even fish, omelet, and cake are separated with the chopsticks,
and the cook, the street scavenger, and the watch repairer use this
device in the form of iron, long bamboo, and delicate ivory. The bamboo
chopstick was known in China 1000 B.C., and shortly after this date
the ivory form was devised. Their use is one of great antiquity in
Japan, as attested by references to it in the ancient records of that
country. One may search in vain for the trace of any object in the
nature of a chopstick in Central or South America. Knitting needles of
wood are found in the work baskets associated with ancient Peruvian
mummies, but the chopstick has not been found. Curious pottery rests for
the chopsticks are exhumed in Japan, but even this enduring testimony of
its early use is yet to be revealed in this country.

The plow in all its varieties has existed in China for countless
centuries. Its ideograph is written in a score of ways. It was early
introduced into Korea and Japan, and spread westward through the Old
World to Scandinavia. There it has been found in the peat bogs. It is
figured on ancient Egyptian monuments, yet it made its appearance in
the New World only with the advent of the Spaniards. This indispensable
implement of agriculture when once introduced was instantly adopted by
the races who came in contact with the Spaniards. Even in Peru, with
its wonderful agricultural development and irrigating canals, no trace
of this device is anciently known, and to-day the tribes of Central and
South America still follow the rude and primitive model first introduced
by their conquerors.

If we study the musical instruments of the New World races we find
various forms of whistles, flutes, rattles, split bells, and drums, but
seek in vain for a stringed instrument of any kind. This is all the more
surprising when we find evidences of the ancient use of the bow. If Dr.
Tylor is right, we may well imagine that the lute of ancient Egypt was
evolved from the musical bow with its gourd resonator (so common in
various parts of Africa), and this in turn an outgrowth of the archer's
bow, or, what at the moment seems quite as probable, the musical bow
might have been the primitive form from which was evolved the archer's
bow on the one hand and the lute on the other. Dr. Mason, in a brief
study of the musical bow, finds it in various forms in Africa and
sporadic cases of it in this country, and expresses the conviction that
stringed musical instruments were not known to any of the aborigines
of the western hemisphere before Columbus. Dr. Brinton is inclined to
dispute this conclusion, though I am led to believe that Dr. Mason is
right; for had this simple musical device been known anciently in this
country, it would have spread so widely that its pre-Columbian use
would have been beyond any contention. In Japan evidences of a stringed
instrument run back to the third or fourth century of our era, and in
China the _kin_ (five strings) and _seih_ (thirteen strings) were known
a thousand years before Christ. These were played in temples of worship,
at religious rites, times of offering, etc. It seems incredible that
any contact sufficient to affect the religious customs of Mexico or
Central America could have occurred without the introduction of a
stringed instrument of some kind.[3]

In the Ceremonial Usages of the Chinese (1100 B.C.), a work already
referred to, one may find allusions to a number of forms of wheeled
carriages, with directions for their construction. Minute details even
are given as to material and dimensions, such as measuring the spoke
holes in the rim with millet seed (reminding one of the modern method of
ascertaining the cubic contents of crania), all indicating the advanced
development of wheeled vehicles. If from this early date in China up
to the fifth century A.D., any people had found their way from China
to middle America, one wonders why the wheel was not introduced. Its
absence must be accounted for. It was certainly not for lack of good
roads or constructive skill. Its appearance in this hemisphere was
synchronous with the Spanish invasion, and when once introduced spread
rapidly north and south. Like the plow, it still remains to-day the
clumsy and primitive model of its Spanish prototype.

The potter's wheel is known to have existed in Asia from the earliest
times; the evidence is not only historical, but is attested by the
occurrence of lathe-turned pottery in ancient graves. We look in vain
for a trace of a potter's wheel in America previous to the sixteenth
century. Mr. Henry C. Mercer regards a potter's device used in Yucatan
as a potter's wheel, and believes it to have been pre-Columbian. This
device, known as the _kabal_, consists of a thick disk of wood which
rests on a slippery board, the potter turning the disk with his feet.
The primitive workman uses his feet to turn, hold, and move objects
in many operations. The primitive potter has always turned his jar in
manipulation rather than move himself about it. Resting the vessel
on a block and revolving it with his feet is certainly the initial
step toward the potter's wheel, but so simple an expedient must not
be regarded as having any relation to the true potter's wheel, which
originated in regions where other kinds of wheels revolving on pivots
were known.

It seems reasonable to believe that had the Chinese, Japanese, or
Koreans visited the Mexican coast in such numbers as is believed they
did, we ought certainly to find some influence, some faint strain, at
least, of the Chinese method of writing in the hitherto unfathomable
inscriptions of Maya and Aztec. Until recently it was not known whether
they were phonetic or ideographic; indeed, Dr. Brinton has devised a
new word to express their character, which he calls ikonomatic. This
distinguished philologist of the American languages confesses that not
even the threshold of investigation in the solution of these enigmatical
puzzles has been passed. Had the Chinese introduced or modified or
even influenced in any way the method of writing as seen on the rock
inscriptions of Central America, one familiar with Chinese might have
found some clew, as was the case in deciphering the ancient writings
of Assyria and Egypt. Grotefend's work on cuneiform inscriptions and
Champollion's interpretation of Egyptian came about by the assumption of
certain inclosures representing historic characters, which were revealed
in one case by an inference and in another by an accompanying Greek
inscription. If we examine the early Chinese characters as shown on
ancient coins of the Hea dynasty (1756 to 2142 B.C.), or the characters
on ancient bronze vases of the Shang dynasty (1113 to 1755 B.C.), we
find most of them readily deciphered by sinologists, and coming down
a few centuries later the characters are quite like those as written
to-day. On some of the many inscribed stone monuments of Central America
one might expect to find some traces of Chinese characters if any
intercourse had taken place, whereas the Maya glypts are remotely unlike
either Chinese or Egyptian writing. Some acute students of this subject
are inclined to believe that these undecipherable characters have been
evolved from pictographs which were primarily derived from the simple
picture writing so common among the races of the New World.

It seems clearly impossible that any intercourse could have taken
place between Asia and America without an interchange of certain
social commodities. The "divine weed," tobacco, has been the comfort
of the races of the western hemisphere north and south for unnumbered
centuries: stone tobacco pipes are exhumed in various parts of the
continent; cigarettes made of corn husks are found in ancient graves and
caves; the metatarsals of a deer, doubly perforated, through which to
inhale tobacco or its smoke in some form, are dug up on the shores of
Lake Titicaca.

The question naturally arises why tobacco was not carried back to Asia
by some of the returning emigrants, or why tea was not introduced into
this country by those early invaders. A Buddhist priest without tea or
tobacco would be an anomaly. There are many other herbs, food plants,
etc., that should not have waited for the Spanish invasion on the one
hand, or the Dutch and Portuguese navigator along the Chinese coast on
the other.

Finally, if evidences of Asiatic contact exist, they should certainly
be found in those matters most closely connected with man, such as his
weapons, clothing, sandals, methods of conveyance, pottery making and
devices thereon, musical instruments, and above all house structure and
modes of burial. More remote perhaps would be survivals of language,
and if the invaders had a written one, the characters, whether phonetic
or ideographic, would have been left in the enduring rock inscriptions.
If now a study of the aborigines of the western hemisphere from Hudson
Bay to Tierra del Fuego fails to reveal even a remote suggestion of
resemblance to any of these various matters above enumerated, their
absence must in some way be accounted for by Asiaticists.

FOOTNOTES:

[1] Mr. Charles Walcott Brooks presented to the California Academy of
Sciences a report of Japanese vessels wrecked on the North Pacific Ocean
in which many instances are given. He says: "Every junk found stranded
on the coast of North America or on the Hawaiian or adjacent islands
has, on examination, proved to be Japanese, and no single instance of
a Chinese vessel has ever been reported, nor is any believed to have
existed.... There also exists an ocean stream of cold water emerging
from the Arctic Ocean which sets close in along the eastern coast of
Asia. This fully accounts for the absence of Chinese junks on the
Pacific, as vessels disabled off their coast would naturally drift
southward."

[2] On the Older Forms of Terra-Cotta Roofing Tiles. Essex Institute
Bulletin, 1882.

[3] Since the above was written Dr. Brinton and Mr. Saville have called
my attention to such evidences as would warrant the belief in the
existence of a pre-Columbian stringed musical instrument. The devices
are, however, of such a nature as to indicate their independent origin.




THE POSSIBLE FIBER INDUSTRIES OF THE UNITED STATES.

BY CHARLES RICHARDS DODGE.


The wealth of any community is dependent on the variety and extent of
its industries, the utilization of local natural resources, and the
employment of the labor of all classes of its population. In locations
of successful industrial operations the farmer derives increased
incomes, the value of his products is greater, his lands of higher
value, and the wages of agricultural labor larger. The rural population
contiguous to large towns, therefore, is more prosperous than the larger
farming contingent more remote from manufacturing or industrial centers.
The farmers of the first class are prosperous because they have a home
market for their dairy products, fruits, vegetables, and other "truck,"
which they are able to produce, for the most part, on small areas by
high culture, while those of the second class are forced to expend their
energies on commercial commodities such as cotton, wool, meat, grain,
etc., with long hauls in transportation, and with heavy competition,
international as well as domestic.

In times of depression, or when competition has grown too heavy, the
cultivation of certain staples may cease to be remunerative, and the
unfortunate producer is compelled to diversify his agriculture, or adopt
some other means of livelihood.

Just such a misfortune has overtaken many farmers in the United States
within the past few years. Within two years, in fact, wheat has been a
drug in the market, while corn has been cheaper in some sections than
coal, and cotton is now so low that it hardly pays to grow it, without
considering the necessity, for the Southern farmer, of competing against
the seventy-five thousand bales of Egyptian cotton which enter our ports
in a year. Confronted with these conditions, there never has been a time
when farmers were more anxious to discover new paying crops. Among
the possible new rural industries that have attracted the attention of
the agricultural class is that of fiber production, though the growth
of certain kinds of fibers in past time has been a source of income
to the country. Already there is a widespread interest in the subject
throughout the West and South, and farmers are only seeking information
regarding the particular practice involved in the cultivation of flax,
ramie, and other fibers, cost of production, market, etc., but many are
asking where the proper seed can be secured with which to make a start.

The importation of unmanufactured flax, hemp, textile grasses, and
other fibers amounts annually to a sum ranging from fifteen million to
twenty million dollars, while the imported manufactures of these fibers
amount to almost double this value, or, in round numbers, approximately
forty-five million dollars. With the establishment and extension of
three or four fiber industries in this country, and with the new
manufacturing enterprises that would grow out of such establishment and
extension, an immense sum could be readily saved to the country, and the
money representing the growth of these fibers would add just so much to
the wealth of the farming class.

There are two ways in which we may arrive at a solution of this problem:
by direct Government aid, and through the intelligently directed efforts
of private enterprise.

Government experiments for the development or extension of vegetable
fiber industries have been instituted, at different times, in many
countries. In some instances these have been confined to testing the
strength of native fibrous substances for comparison with similar tests
of commercial fibers. Such were the almost exhaustive experiments of
Roxburgh in India early in the present century. Another direction for
Government experimentation has been the testing of machines to supersede
costly hand labor in the preparation of the raw material for market, or
in the development of chemical processes for the further preparation of
the fibers for manufacture. The broadest field of experiment, however,
has been the growth of the plants under different conditions, either
to introduce their culture, or to economically develop the industries
growing out of their culture, when such industries need to be fostered.
The introduction of ramie culture is an example of the first instance,
the fostering of the almost extinct flax industry of our grandfathers'
days an illustration of the second.

The United States has conducted experiments or instituted inquiries in
the fiber interest at various times in the last fifty years, but it is
only since 1890 that an office of practical experiment and inquiry has
been established by the United States Department of Agriculture, that
has been continuous through a term of years.

[Illustration: A COTTON FIELD IN MISSISSIPPI.]

In the present work the efforts of the Government have been mainly
directed in the line of collecting and disseminating authoritative
information relating to all branches of the industry, in importing
proper seed for experimental cultivation, and in directing experiments,
either on its own account or in co-operation with State and even private
interests. The testing of new labor-saving machinery has also come
within its province.

The subject in its details will be better understood by considering
the list of the more important commercial fibers known to our market.
The list is not a long one, for it barely reaches a total of fifteen
species. The fibers of the first rank are the spinning fibers--namely,
cotton, flax, hemp, jute; of the second rank, or cordage fibers, Sisal,
Manila, Sunn and Mauritius hemps, and New Zealand flax; and of the third
rank, Tampico, or ixtle, African fiber or palmetto, coir or cocoanut,
piassaba, Mexican whisk, raffia, and Spanish moss, which are used in
brush manufacture, in upholstery, and for other rough manufactures.
Of these fifteen forms, only cotton, hemp, palmetto, and Spanish moss
are produced in the United States in commercial quantity, though
flax line has been produced to some extent in the past. Of those not
produced in commercial quantity in this country, but which would thrive
in cultivation, may be mentioned jute, New Zealand flax, Sisal hemp,
cocoanut, and possibly Sunn hemp in subtropical Florida, with a few
"substitutes," which will be mentioned hereafter.

I have neglected to mention in this list the sponge cucumber, a species
of _Luffa_ used as a bath sponge, which is imported from Japan in
quantity, and which grows in the United States.

Passing the list of recognized commercial fibers, we come to a large
number of species, forms allied to the above, that are either employed
locally, chiefly by the natives in the countries where grown, or that
would be capable of employment in the world's manufacture were they not
inferior to the standard commercial forms at present recognized, and
with which they would necessarily compete at a disadvantage. This list
is a long one, for in the single genus _Agave_, to which belong the
plant producing the Sisal hemp of commerce, there are over one hundred
species in Mexico alone, more than one half of which would produce good
fiber. In our own country it would be possible to enumerate twenty
species of plants that are recognized as American weeds, the fibers of
which could be employed as hemp, flax, or jute substitutes were these
materials unobtainable, besides half as many structural fiber plants
similar to the agave, the products of which could be employed as cordage
fiber substitutes in the same manner. Many of these uncultivated plants
have been known to the aborigines for years, possibly for centuries, as
we find their fiber, produced in varied forms of rude manufacture, in
ancient tombs or other burial places.

[Illustration: PULLING FLAX IN MINNESOTA.]

After exhausting the list of plants that may be termed commercial
fiber substitutes, in different countries where they grow, there still
remains a much larger list of species that are chiefly interesting in a
scientific enumeration of those plants which produce in their stalks,
leaves, or seed vessels what may be termed fibrous substance. My own
catalogue of the fibers of the world already foots up over one thousand
species of plants, and the complete catalogue for all countries might
extend the list to a thousand more.

In considering the undeveloped fibers of the United States, it will
be seen we should only recognize the actual commercial forms which we
do not produce, but which may be produced within our borders, or such
native growths as may be economically employed as their substitutes, and
which possibly might be brought into commercial importance.

The hemp industry is already established, though it should be extended
in order to recover its lost position among American rural industries.
Where in the past we produced forty thousand tons of hemp in the
United States, we now produce less than a fifth of this quantity. The
cultivation of flax in the United States before the days of the present
factory system was so widespread that it was of national importance.
Its manufacture was largely a home industry, however, conducted by the
fireside, and, as in ancient Greece and Rome, the work was performed by
the women of the household. With the advent of the factory system came
competition; the housewife laid aside her spinning wheel, the clumsy
home-made loom fell into disuse, and the farmer grew no more flax for
fiber. Then the flaxseed industry was extended, and after the close of
the war a large demand sprang up for coarse fiber for the roughest of
uses--for bagging and upholstery, in connection with hemp--and hundreds
of little tow mills came into existence in the Middle and Western
States.

The introduction of jute opened another chapter, and the decline of this
crude attempt at a flax industry is recorded. Meanwhile some line flax
was produced, but the extension of spinning and weaving establishments
made a larger demand for this fiber, which was chiefly imported. Land
in the old flax-growing States became more valuable for other crops,
especially with the low prices brought about by foreign competition, and
gradually the flax culture in the United States became a thing of the
past.

In recent years similar causes have served to operate against the
industry in foreign flax countries where old and plodding methods are
still in vogue, with additional factors in impoverished soils and high
rental for land, and the cultural industry abroad is declining. With
the opening of new and fertile Western lands in this country, and with
the employment of the finest labor-saving agricultural implements in
the world, the conditions are again changed, and are now favorable for
American agriculture to re-establish this industry, and to make good a
declining foreign supply. Our farmers are ready for the work, but they
have not only lost their skill and cunning in producing the straw and
preparing the fiber for the spinner, but new and more economical methods
must be adopted to place the culture on a solid basis.

[Illustration: HACKLING FLAX.]

A million acres of flax are grown for seed annually, but the growth
of flax for seed and flax for fiber are two very different things;
moreover, Old World methods do not coincide with the progressive ideas
of the educated farmers of the United States, for the peasant class
does not exist in this country. A practice essentially American must be
followed in order to make the culture profitable, and to equalize the
difference in wages on the two sides of the Atlantic. This difference is
more apparent than real, for it can be readily overcome by intelligently
directed effort, by difference in soil fertility and rentals, and
especially by the use of certain forms of labor-saving machines that
already have been devised and are being rapidly improved. The "American
practice," then, means, first, an intelligent practice, with a view to
economy of effort and involving the use of machinery in the place of
plodding foreign methods; and, second, the co-operation of farm labor
and capital to the end of systematizing the work--i.e., the farmers of a
community growing the flax, and capital, represented by a central mill,
turning the straw when grown into a grade of fiber that the spinners
can afford to purchase. Here is the solution of the flax problem in a
nutshell. The scheme has already been tested in practice with favorable
results, but the farmers in any community can do little until capital is
more generally interested.

[Illustration: CALIFORNIA HEMP.]

This brings up an important point and presents another obstacle, for
great harm has been done to all new fiber industries in recent years
by the misdirected efforts of some professional promoters. In certain
instances the organized fiber companies have been mere stock-jobbing
concerns. They have had their rise and fall, men with idle money have
burned their fingers, and the particular industry has received a "black
eye."

The story of Government effort toward the establishment of the flax
industry need not be told here; there has been widespread prejudice to
overcome, with the opposition of the importers, discouragements to be
studied and explained, the unvarnished truth to be told, and practical
and authoritative information to be given to all who may seek it. The
literature of the subject has been disseminated by thousands of copies,
and new editions are being ordered.

As to the results: Superior flax has been produced in this country in
limited quantities since the work began, and through extended field
experiments flax regions have been discovered that are thought to equal
the best flax centers of Europe. The department experiments in the
Puget Sound region of Washington have demonstrated that we possess in
that State a climate and soil that bid fair to rival the celebrated
flax region of Courtrai, and from these experiments scutched flax has
been produced that is valued by manufacturers in Ireland at three
hundred and fifty dollars per ton, and hackled flax worth five hundred
dollars per ton. Much has been done, but a great deal more remains
to be accomplished in bringing together the farmer and capitalist in
the practical work of growing, _retting, scutching, and preparing for
market_ American flax fiber, for questions of culture are settled.

[Illustration: SPREADING HEMP IN KENTUCKY.]

We should restore our hemp industry to its former proportions by
producing high-grade instead of low-grade fiber. The growth of a grade
of American hemp that will sell for six to eight cents per pound,
instead of three to three and a half cents per pound, as at the present
time, means that our farmers must follow more closely the careful
practices of Europe, and especially that they must adopt water retting
in place of the present practice of dew retting, which gives a fiber
dark in color and uneven in quality. A careful consideration of the
practices of Italy and France as set forth in Fiber Report No. 11,
Department of Agriculture, will materially aid those who desire to
change their product from the cheaper dark hemps, for which there is
small demand, to the higher-priced light hemps, which will compete with
the imported commodity.

One of the most interesting problems of the day in the utilization of
the new fiber material, and one that is attracting the attention of all
civilized countries, is the industrial production of that wonderful
substance known in the Orient as China grass, in India as rhea, and
in Europe and America as ramie. The money spent by governments and by
private enterprise throughout the world, in experiments and inventions,
in the effort to establish the ramie industry, would make up the total
of a princely fortune. Obstacle after obstacle has been overcome in the
years of persistent effort, and now we stand before the last barrier,
baffled for the time, but still hopeful, and with efforts unrelaxed.
The difficulty may be stated in a few words: ramie culture will only
become a paying industry when an economically successful machine for
stripping the fiber has been placed on the market. Hundreds of thousands
of dollars have been spent in efforts to perfect a machine, but no
Government fiber expert in the world recognizes that we have such a
machine at the present time, though great progress has been made in
machine construction.

The world's interest in this fiber began in 1869, when a reward of
five thousand pounds was offered by the Government of India for the
best machine with which to decorticate the green stalks. The first
exhibition and trial of machines took place in 1872, resulting in utter
failure. The reward was again offered, and in 1879 a second official
trial was held, at which ten machines competed, though none filled the
requirements, and subsequently the offer was withdrawn. The immediate
result was to stimulate invention in many countries, and from 1869
to the present time inventors have been untiring in their efforts
to produce a successful machine. The commercial history of ramie,
therefore, does not extend further back than 1869.

The first French official trials took place in 1888, followed by the
trials of 1889, in Paris, at which the writer was present, and which
are recorded in the official reports of the Fiber Investigation series.
Another trial was held in 1891, and in the same year the first official
trials in America took place, in the State of Vera Cruz, in Mexico,
followed the next year by the official trials of American machines in
the United States, these being followed by the trials of 1894. Since
that year further progress in machine construction has been made, and a
third official trial should be held in the near future.

[Illustration: GROWTH OF JUTE IN LOUISIANA.]

The first records of Chinese shipments of this fiber to European markets
show that in 1872 two hundred or three hundred tons of the fiber were
sent to London, valued at eighty pounds per ton, or about four hundred
dollars. India also sent small shipments, but there was a light demand,
with a considerable reduction in price, the quotations being thirty
pounds to forty pounds per ton for Chinese and ten pounds to thirty
pounds for the Indian product.

Those who are unacquainted with the properties and uses of this
wonderful textile may peruse with interest the following paragraph from
Fiber Report 7, on the Cultivation of Ramie, issued by the Department of
Agriculture:

"The fiber of ramie is strong and durable, is of all fibers least
affected by moisture, and from these characteristics must take first
rank in value as a textile substance. It has three times the strength
of Russian hemp, while its filaments can be separated almost to the
fineness of silk. In manufacture it has been spun on various forms of
textile machinery, also used in connection with cotton, wool, and silk,
and can be employed as a substitute in certain forms of manufacture for
all these textiles and for flax also, where elasticity is not essential.
It likewise produces superior paper, the fineness and close texture of
its pulp making it a most valuable bank-note paper. In England, France,
Germany, Austria, and in our own country to an experimental extent, the
fiber has also been woven into a great variety of fabrics, covering
the widest range of uses, such as lace, lace curtains, handkerchiefs,
cloth, or white goods resembling fine linen, dress goods, napkins, table
damask, table covers, bedspreads, drapery for curtains or lambrequins,
plush, and even carpets and fabrics suitable for clothing. The fiber
can be dyed in all desirable shades or colors, some examples having the
luster and brilliancy of silk. In China and Japan the fiber is extracted
by hand labor; it is not only manufactured into cordage, fish lines,
nets, and similar coarse manufactures, but woven into the finest and
most beautiful of fabrics."

China is at present the source of supply of the raw product, and the
world's demand is only about ten thousand tons, nine tenths of this
quantity being absorbed in Oriental countries. The ramie situation in
the United States at the present time may be briefly summarized as
follows:

The plant can be grown successfully in California and in the Gulf
States, and will produce from two to four crops per year without
replanting, giving from two hundred and fifty to eight hundred pounds
of fiber per acre, dependent upon the number of cuttings, worth perhaps
four cents per pound. The machines for preparing this fiber for market
are hardly able at the present time to clean the product of one
acre (single crop) in a day, and the fiber is quite inferior to the
commercial China grass. A new French machine produces a quality of fiber
which approaches the China grass of commerce, but its output per day
is too small to make its use profitable in this country. All obstacles
in chemical treatment of the fiber and in spinning and manufacture are
overcome, and the world is waiting for the successful device which will
economically prepare the raw material for market.

The part the United States Government is taking in the work is to
co-operate in experiments, to issue publications giving all desired
information regarding culture, the machine question, and the utilization
of the fiber. It tests new decorticators and reports to the public
upon their merits or demerits. It cautions farmers and capitalists,
for the present, to go into the industry with their eyes open, for the
professional promoter has seized upon this industry, above all others
in the fiber interest, as one in which he can more readily gull a
gullible public. Nevertheless, responsible capitalists are making every
legitimate effort to place the manufacturing industry on a solid basis
in this country, and to attain to the progress made in other countries
where manufacture has already been established, and where the Chinese
fiber is employed as the raw material.

[Illustration: A FLORIDA SISAL HEMP PLANT.]

Thus far I have only considered spinning fibers. More than one half
of the raw fibers imported in the United States are employed in the
manufacture of rope and small twine, or bagging for baling the cotton
crop. Cordage is manufactured chiefly from the Manila and Sisal hemps,
the former derived from the Philippine Islands, the latter from Yucatan.
Some jute is also used in this industry, though the fiber is more
largely employed in bagging; and some common hemp, such as is grown in
Kentucky, is also used.

We can not produce Manila hemp in the United States, and this substance
will always hold its own for marine cordage. Jute will grow to
perfection in many of the Southern States, but it is doubtful if we can
produce it at a price low enough to compete with the cheaper grades of
the imported India fiber. Rough flax and common hemp might be used in
lieu of jute, in bagging manufacture, but the question of competition
is still a factor. Sisal hemp, which has been imported to the value
of seven million dollars a year, when prices were high, will grow in
southern Florida, and the plant has been the subject of exhaustive
study and experiment. This plant was first grown in the United States
on Indian Key, Florida, about 1836, a few plants having been introduced
from Mexico by Dr. Henry Perrine, and from this early attempt at
cultivation the species has spread over southern Florida, the remains
of former small experimental tracts being found at many points, though
uncared for.

[Illustration: PINEAPPLE FIELD IN FLORIDA.]

The high prices of cordage fibers in 1890 and 1891, brought about by the
schemes of certain cordage concerns, called attention to the necessity
of producing, if possible, a portion of the supply of these hard fibers
within our own borders. In 1891, in response to requests for definite
information regarding the growth of the Sisal hemp plant, a preliminary
survey of the Key system and Biscayne Bay region of southern Florida
was made by the Department of Agriculture, and in the following year an
experimental factory was established at Cocoanut Grove with special
machinery sent down for the work. With this equipment, and with a
fast-sailing yacht at the disposal of the special agent in charge of
the experiments, a careful study of the Sisal hemp plant, its fiber,
and the possibility of the industry was made, and the results were duly
published. About this time the Bahaman Government became interested in
the industry, and with shiploads of plants, both purchased and gathered
without cost on the uninhabited Florida Keys, the Bahamans _began the
new industry_ by setting out extensive plantations on the different
islands of the group. The high prices of 1890 having overstimulated
production in Yucatan, two or three years later there was a tremendous
fall in the market price of Sisal hemp, and Florida's interest in the
new fiber subsided, though small plantations had been attempted. In
the meantime, American invention having continued its efforts in the
construction of cleaning devices, two successful machines for preparing
the raw fiber have been produced which have, in a measure, superseded
the clumsy _raspadore_ hitherto universally employed for the purpose,
and one of the obstacles to the production of the fiber in Florida is
removed. The reaction toward better prices has already begun, and the
future establishment of an American Sisal hemp industry in southern
Florida is a possibility, though there are several practical questions
yet to be settled.

Pineapple culture is already a flourishing industry in the Sisal hemp
region. A pineapple plant matures but one apple in a season, and after
the harvest of fruit the old leaves are of no further use to the plant,
and may be removed. The leaves have the same structural system as the
agaves--that is, they are composed of a cellular mass through which the
fibers extend, and when the epidermis and pulpy matter are eliminated
the residue is a soft, silklike filament, the value of which has long
been recognized. Only fifty pounds of this fiber can be obtained from a
ton of leaves, but, as the product would doubtless command double the
price of Sisal hemp, its production would be profitable. How to secure
this fiber cheaply is the problem. The Sisal hemp machines are too
rough in action for so fine a fiber, and, at the rate of ten leaves to
the pound, working up a ton of the material would mean the handling of
over twenty thousand leaves to secure perhaps three dollars' worth of
the commercial product. Were the fiber utilized in the arts, however,
and its place established, it would compete in a measure with flax as a
spinning fiber, for its filaments are divisible to the ten-thousandth of
an inch. The substance has already been utilized to a slight extent in
Eastern countries (being hand-prepared) in the manufacture of costly,
filmy, cobweblike fabrics that will almost float in air.

Another possible fiber industry for Florida is the cultivation of
bowstring hemp, or the fiber of a species of _Sansevieria_ that grows
in rank luxuriance throughout the subtropical region of the State.
The fiber is finer and softer than Sisal hemp, though not so fine as
pineapple fiber, and would command in price a figure between the two.
The yield is about sixty pounds to the ton of leaves. Many other textile
plants might be named that have been experimented with by the Government
or through private enterprise, but the most important, in a commercial
sense, have been named.

[Illustration: A PLANT OF NEW ZEALAND FLAX.]

There is a considerable list of plants, however, which are the subject
of frequent inquiry, but which will never be utilized commercially as
long as other more useful fibers hold the market. These for the most
part produce bast fiber, and the farmer knows them as wild field growths
or weeds. They are interesting in themselves, and many of them produce
a fair quality of fiber, but to what extent they might be brought into
cultivation, or how economically the raw material might be prepared,
are questions the details of which only experiment can determine. But
the fact that at best they can only be regarded as the substitutes for
better, already established, commercial fibers has prevented serious
experiment to ascertain their place. They are continually brought to
notice, however, for again and again the thrifty farmer, as he finds
their bleached and weather-beaten filaments clinging to the dead stalks
in the fields, deludes himself in believing that he has made a discovery
which may lead to untold wealth, and a letter and the specimen are
promptly dispatched to the fiber expert for information concerning them.
In such cases all that can be done is to give full information, taking
care to let the inquirer down as easily as possible.

The limit of practical work in the direction of new textile industries
is so clearly defined that the expert need never be in doubt regarding
the economic value of any fiber plant that may be submitted to him for
an opinion, and the long catalogue of mere fibrous substances will never
demand his serious attention.

In studying the problem of the establishment of new fiber industries,
therefore, we should consider "materials" rather than particular species
of plants--utility or adaptation rather than acclimatization. We should
study the entire range of textile manufacture, and before giving
attention to questions of cultivation we should first ascertain how far
the plants which we already know can be produced within our own borders
may be depended upon to supply the "material" adapted to present demands
in manufacture. If the larger part of our better fabrics--cordage and
fine twines, bagging, and similar rough goods--can be made from cotton,
flax, common hemp, and Sisal hemp, which we ought to be able to produce
in quantity at home, there is no further need of costly experiments with
other fibers. Unfortunately, however, it is possible for manufacturers
to "discriminate" against a particular fiber when the use of another
fiber better subserves their private interests. As an example, common
hemp was discriminated against in a certain form of small cordage, in
extensive use, because by employing other, imported fibers, it has been
possible in the past to control the supply, and in this day of trusts
such control is an important factor in regulating the profits. With
common hemp grown on a thousand American farms in 1890, the price of
Sisal and Manila hemp binding twine, of which fifty thousand tons were
used, would never have been forced up to sixteen and twenty cents a
pound, when common hemp, which is just as good for the purpose, could
have been produced in unlimited quantity for three and a half cents.
The bagging with which the cotton crop is baled is made of imported
jute, but common hemp or even low-grade flax would make better bagging.
A change from jute to hemp or flax in the manufacture of bagging (it
would only be a return to these fibers), could it be brought about,
would mean an advantage of at least three million dollars to our
farmers. Yet in considering such a desirable change we are confronted
with two questions: Is it possible to compete with foreign jute? and
can prejudice be overcome? For it is true that there are, even among
farmers, those who would hesitate to buy hemp bagging at the same price
as jute bagging because it was not the thing they were familiar with.
But some of them will buy inferior jute twine, colored to resemble hemp,
at the price of hemp, and never question the fraud.

[Illustration: CABBAGE PALMETTO IN FLORIDA.]

Our farmers waste the fibrous straw produced on the million acres of
flax grown for seed. It has little value, it is true, for the production
of good spinning flax, yet by modifying present methods of culture,
salable fiber can be produced and the seed saved as well, giving two
paying crops from the same harvest where now the flaxseed grower secures
but one.

In summarizing the situation in this country, therefore, it will be seen
that, out of the hundreds of fibrous plants known to the botanist and to
the fiber expert, the textile economist need only consider four or five
species and their varieties, all of them supplying well-known commercial
products that are regularly quoted in the world's market price current,
the cultivation and preparation of which are known quantities. Were the
future of new fiber industries in this country to rest upon this simple
statement, there would be little need of further effort. The problem,
however, is one of economical adaptation to conditions not widely
understood in the first place, and not altogether within control in the
second.

Twenty flax farmers in a community decide to grow flax for fiber, and
two of these farmers are perhaps acquainted with the culture. They go
to work each in his own way; ten make a positive failure in cultivation
for lack of proper direction, five of the remaining ten fail in retting
the straw, and five succeed in turning out as many different grades
of flax line, only one grade of which may come up to the standard
required by the spinners. And all of them will have lost money. If the
failure is investigated it will be discovered that the proper seed was
not used; in some instances the soil was not adapted to the culture,
and old-fashioned ideas prevailed in the practice followed. The straw
was not pulled at the proper time, and it was improperly retted. The
breaking and scutching were accomplished in a primitive way, because the
farmers could not afford to purchase the necessary machinery, and of
course they all lost money, and decided in future to let flax alone.

But the next year the president of the local bank, the secretary
of the town board of trade, and three or four prosperous merchants
formed a little company and built a flax mill. A competent
superintendent--perhaps an old country flax-man--was employed, a
quantity of good seed was imported, and the company contracted with
these twenty farmers to grow five, ten, or fifteen acres of flax straw
each, under the direction of the old Scotch superintendent. The seed
was sold to them to be paid for in product; they were advised regarding
proper soil and the best practice to follow; they grew good straw, and
when it was ready to harvest the company took it off their hands at a
stipulated price per ton. The superintendent of the mill assumed all
further responsibility, attended to the retting, and worked up the
product. Result: several carloads of salable flax fiber shipped to the
Eastern market in the winter, the twenty farmers had "money to burn"
instead of flax straw, and the company was able to declare a dividend.
This is not altogether a supposititious case, and it illustrates the
point that in this day of specialties the fiber industry can only be
established by co-operation.

In all these industries, whether the fiber cultivated is flax, ramie,
or jute, the machine question enters so largely into the problem of
their successful establishment that the business must be conducted on a
large scale. Even in the growth of Sisal hemp in Florida, should it be
attempted, the enterprise will only pay when the necessary mill plant
for extracting the fiber is able to draw upon a cultivated area of five
hundred acres. In other words, the small farmer can never become a
fiber producer independently, but must represent a single wheel in the
combination.

[Illustration: THE LUFFA, OR SPONGE CUCUMBER.]

The subject is a vast one, and, while I have been able to set forth the
importance of these industries as new sources of national prosperity,
only an outline has been given of the difficulties which are factors in
the industrial problem. Summing up the points of vantage, the market is
already assured; through years of study and experiment we are beginning
to better understand the particular conditions that influence success
or failure in this country; we have the best agricultural implements in
the world, and American inventive genius will be able, doubtless, in
time, to perfect the new mechanical devices which are so essential to
economical production; our farmers are intelligent and industrious, and
need only the promise of a fair return for their labor to enter heart
and soul into this work.




WHAT IS SOCIAL EVOLUTION?

BY HERBERT SPENCER.


Though to Mr. Mallock the matter will doubtless seem otherwise, to most
it will seem that he is not prudent in returning to the question he has
raised; since the result must be to show again how unwarranted is the
interpretation he has given of my views. Let me dispose of the personal
question before passing to the impersonal one.

He says that I, declining to take any notice of those other passages
which he has quoted from me, treat his criticism as though it were
"founded exclusively on the particular passage which" I deal with, "or
at all events to rest on that passage as its principal foundation and
justification."[4] It would be a sufficient reply that in a letter to a
newspaper numerous extracts are inadmissible; but there is the further
reply that I had his own warrant for regarding the passage in question
as conclusively showing the truth of his representations. He writes:--

     Should any doubt as to the matter still remain in the reader's
     mind, it will be dispelled by the quotation of one further passage.
     "_A true social aggregate_," he says ["_as distinct from a mere
     large family_], _is a union of like individuals, independent of one
     another in parentage, and approximately equal in capacities_."[5]

I do not see how, having small liberty of quotation, I could do better
than take, as summarizing his meaning, this sentence which he gives as
dissipating "any doubt." But now let me repeat the paragraph in which I
have pointed out how distorted is Mr. Mallock's interpretation of this
sentence.

     Every reader will assume that this extract is from some
     passage treating of human societies. He will be wrong, however. It
     forms part of a section describing Super-Organic Evolution at large
     ("Principles of Sociology," sec. 3), and treating, more especially,
     of the social insects; the purpose of the section being to exclude
     these from consideration. It is implied that the inquiry about to
     be entered upon concerns societies formed of like units, and not
     societies formed of units extremely unlike. It is pointed out that
     among the _Termites_ there are six unlike forms, and among the
     Sauba ants, besides the two sexually-developed forms, there are
     three classes of workers--one indoor and two outdoor. The members
     of such communities--queens, males, soldiers, workers--differ
     widely in their structures, instincts, and powers. These
     communities formed of units extremely unequal in their capacities
     are contrasted with communities formed of units approximately equal
     in their capacities--the human communities about to be dealt with.
     When I thus distinguished between groups of individuals having
     widely different sets of faculties, and groups of individuals
     having similar sets of faculties (constituting their common human
     nature), I never imagined that by speaking of these last as having
     approximately equal capacities, in contrast with the first as
     having extremely unequal ones, I might be supposed to deny that any
     considerable differences existed among these last. Mr. Mallock,
     however, detaching this passage from its context, represents it as
     a deliberate characterization to be thereafter taken for granted;
     and, on the strength of it, ascribes to me the absurd belief that
     there are no marked superiorities and inferiorities among men! or,
     that if there are, no social results flow from them![6]

Though I thought it well thus to repudiate the absurd belief ascribed to
me, I did not think it well to enter upon a discussion of Mr. Mallock's
allegations at large. He says I ought to have given to the matter "more
than the partial and inconclusive attention he has [I have] bestowed
upon it." Apparently he forgets that if a writer on many subjects deals
in full with all who challenge his conclusions, he will have time for
nothing else; and he forgets that one who, at the close of life, has
but a small remnant of energy left, while some things of moment remain
to be done, must as a rule leave assailants unanswered or fail in his
more important aims. Now, however, that Mr. Mallock has widely diffused
his misinterpretations, I feel obliged, much to my regret, to deal
with them. He will find that my reply does not consist merely of a
repudiation of the absurdity he ascribes to me.

       *       *       *       *       *

The title of his book is a misnomer. I do not refer to the fact that
the word "Aristocracy," though used in a legitimate sense, is used in a
sense so unlike that now current as to be misleading: that is patent.
Nor do I refer to the fact that the word "Evolution," covering, as it
does, all orders of phenomena, is wrongly used when it is applied to
that single group of phenomena constituting Social Evolution. But I
refer to the fact that his book does not concern Social Evolution at
all: it concerns social life, social activity, social prosperity. Its
facts bear somewhat the same relation to the facts of Social Evolution
as an account of a man's nutrition and physical welfare bears to an
account of his bodily structure and functions.

In an essay on "Progress: its Law and Cause," published in 1857,
containing an outline of the doctrine which I have since elaborated in
the ten volumes of _Synthetic Philosophy_, I commenced by pointing out
defects in the current conception of progress.

     It takes in not so much the reality of Progress as its
     accompaniments--not so much the substance as the shadow. That
     progress in intelligence seen during the growth of the child into
     the man, or the savage into the philosopher, is commonly regarded
     as consisting in the greater number of facts known and laws
     understood: whereas the actual progress consists in those internal
     modifications of which this increased knowledge is the expression.
     Social progress is supposed to consist in the produce of a greater
     quantity and variety of the articles required for satisfying men's
     wants; in the increasing security of person and property; in
     widening freedom of action: whereas, rightly understood, social
     progress consists in those changes of structure in the social
     organism which have entailed these consequences. The current
     conception is a teleological one. The phenomena are contemplated
     solely as bearing on human happiness. Only those changes are
     held to constitute progress which directly or indirectly tend
     to heighten human happiness. And they are thought to constitute
     progress simply _because_ they tend to heighten human happiness.
     But rightly to understand progress, we must inquire what is the
     nature of these changes, considered apart from our interests.[7]

With the view of excluding these anthropocentric interpretations and
also because it served better to cover those inorganic changes which the
word "progress" suggests but vaguely, I employed the word "evolution."
But my hope that, by the use of this word, irrelevant facts and
considerations would be set aside, proves ill-grounded. Mr. Mallock now
includes under it those things which I endeavored to exclude. He is
dominated by the current idea of progress as a process of improvement,
in the human sense; and is thus led to join with those social changes
which constitute advance in social organization, those social changes
which are ancillary to it--not constituting parts of the advance itself,
but yielding fit materials and conditions. It is true that he recognizes
social science as aiming "to deduce our civilization of to-day from
the condition of the primitive savage." It is true that he says social
science "primarily sets itself to explain, not how a given set of
social conditions affects those who live among them, but how social
conditions at one epoch are different from those of another, how each
set of conditions is the resultant of those preceding it."[8] But in
his conception as thus indicated he masses together not the phenomena
of developing social structures and functions only, but all those which
accompany them; as is shown by the complaint he approvingly cites
that the sociological theory set forth by me does not yield manifest
solutions of current social problems:[9] clearly implying the belief
that an account of social evolution containing no lessons which he who
runs may read is erroneous.

While Mr. Mallock's statements and arguments thus recognize Social
Evolution in a general way, and its continuity with evolution of simpler
kinds, they do not recognize that definition of evolution under its
various forms, social included, which it has been all along my purpose
to illustrate in detail. He refers to evolution as exhibited in the
change from a savage to a civilized state; but he does not ask in what
the change essentially consists, and, not asking this, does not see what
alone is to be included in an account of it. Let us contemplate for a
moment the two extremes of the process.

Here is a wandering cluster of men, or rather of families, concerning
which, considered as an aggregate, little more can be said than can be
said of a transitory crowd: the group considered as a whole is to be
described not so much by characters as by the absence of characters. It
is so loose as hardly to constitute an aggregate, and it is practically
structureless. Turn now to a civilized society. No longer a small
wandering group but a vast stationary nation, it presents us with a
multitude of parts which, though separate in various degrees, are tied
together by their mutual dependence. The cluster of families forming
a primitive tribe separates with impunity: now increase of size, now
dissension, now need for finding food, causes it from time to time
to divide; and the resulting smaller clusters carry on what social
life they have just as readily as before. But it is otherwise with a
developed society. Not only by its stationariness is this prevented from
dividing bodily, but its parts, though distinct, have become so closely
connected that they can not live without mutual aid. It is impossible
for the agricultural community to carry on its business if it has not
the clothing which the manufacturing community furnishes. Without fires
neither urban nor rural populations can do their work, any more than can
the multitudinous manufacturers who need engines and furnaces; so that
these are all dependent on coal-miners. The tasks of the mason and the
builder must be left undone unless the quarryman and the carpenter have
been active. Throughout all towns and villages retail traders obtain
from the Manchester district the calicoes they want, from Leeds their
woolens, from Sheffield their cutlery. And so throughout, in general
and in detail. That is to say, the whole nation is made coherent by the
dependence of its parts on one another--a dependence so great that an
extensive strike of coal-miners checks the production of iron, throws
many thousands of ship-builders out of work, adds to the outlay for
coal in all households, and diminishes railway dividends. Here then is
one primary contrast--the primitive tribe is incoherent, the civilized
nation is coherent.

While the developing society has thus become integrated, it has passed
from its original uniform state into a multiform state. Among savages
there are no unlikenesses of occupations. Every man is hunter and upon
occasion warrior; every man builds his own hut, makes his own weapons;
every wife digs roots, catches fish, and carries the household goods
when a change of locality is needed: what division of labor exists is
only between the sexes. We all know that it is quite otherwise with a
civilized nation. The changes which have produced the coherence have
done this by producing the division of labor: the two going on _pari
passu_. The great parts and the small parts, and the parts within parts,
into which a modern society is divisible, are clusters of men made
unlike in so far as they discharge the unlike functions required for
maintaining the national life. Rural laborers and farmers, manufacturers
and their workpeople, wholesale merchants and retailers, etc., etc.,
constitute differentiated groups, which make a society as a whole
extremely various in composition. Not only in its industrial divisions
is it various, but also in its governmental divisions, from the
components of the legislature down through the numerous kinds and grades
of officials, down through the many classes of masters and subordinates,
down through the relations of shopkeeper and journeyman, mistress and
maid. That is to say, the change which has been taking place is, under
one aspect, a change from homogeneity of the parts to heterogeneity of
the parts.

A concomitant change has been from a state of vague structure, so far
as there is any, to a state of distinct structure. Even the primary
differentiation in the lowest human groups is confused and unsettled.
The aboriginal chief, merely a superior warrior, is a chief only
while war lasts--loses all distinction and power when war ceases; and
even when he becomes a settled chief, he is still so little marked
off from the rest that he carries on his hut-building, tool-making,
fishing, etc., just as the rest do. In such organization as exists
nothing is distinguished, everything is confused. Quite otherwise is
it in the developed nation. The various occupations, at the same time
that they have become multitudinous, have become clearly specialized
and sharply limited. Read the London Directory, and while shown how
numerous they are, you are shown by the names how distinct they are.
This increasing distinctness has been shown from the early stages
when all freemen were warriors, through the days when retainers now
fought and now tilled their fields, down to the times of standing
armies; or again from the recent days when in each rural household,
besides the bread-winning occupation, there were carried on spinning,
brewing, washing, to the present day when these several supplementary
occupations have been deputed to separate classes exclusively devoted
to them. It has been shown from the ages when guilds quarreled about
the things included in their respective few businesses, down to our
age when the many businesses of artisans are fenced round and disputed
over if transgressed, as lately by boilermakers and fitters; and is
again shown by the ways in which the professions--medical, legal, and
other--form themselves into bodies which shut out from practice, if they
can, all who do not bear their stamp. And throughout the governmental
organization, from its first stage in which the same man played various
parts--legislative, executive, judicial, militant, ecclesiastic--to
late stages when the powers and functions of the multitudinous classes
of officials are clearly prescribed, may be traced this increasing
sharpness of division among the component parts of a society. That is to
say, there has been a change from the indefinite to the definite. While
the social organization has advanced in coherence and heterogeneity, it
has also advanced in definiteness.

If, now, Mr. Mallock will turn to _First Principles_, he will there
see that under its chief aspect Evolution is said to be a change from
a state of indefinite, incoherent homogeneity to a state of definite,
coherent heterogeneity. If he reads further on he will find that these
several traits of evolution are successively exemplified throughout
astronomic changes, geologic changes, the changes displayed by each
organism, by the aggregate of all organisms, by the development of the
mental powers, by the genesis of societies, and by the various products
of social life--language, science, art, etc. If he pursues the inquiry
he will see that in the series of treatises (from which astronomy
and geology were for brevity's sake omitted) dealing with biology,
psychology, and sociology, the purpose has been to elaborate the
interpretations sketched out in _First Principles_; and that I have not
been concerned in any of them to do more than delineate those changes of
structure and function which, according to the definition, constitute
Evolution. He will see that in treating of social evolution I have dealt
only with the transformation through which the primitive small social
germ has passed into the vast highly developed nation. And perhaps he
will then see that those which he regards as all-important factors are
but incidentally referred to by me because they are but unimportant
factors in this process of transformation. The agencies which he
emphasizes, and in one sense rightly emphasizes, are not agencies by
which the development of structures and functions has been effected;
they are only agencies by which social life has been facilitated and
exalted, and aids furnished for further social evolution.

       *       *       *       *       *

Respecting the essential causes of this social transformation, it must
suffice to say that it results from certain general traits in human
beings, joined with the influences of their varying circumstances.

Every man aims to pass from desire to satisfaction with the least
possible hindrance--follows the line of least resistance. Either the
shortest path, or the path which presents fewest impediments, is that
which he chooses; and the like applies to courses of conduct at large:
he does not use great effort to satisfy a want when small effort will
do. Given his surroundings and the occupation he chooses, when choice
is possible, is that which promises a satisfactory livelihood with
the least tax on such powers as he has, bodily and mental--is the
easiest to his particular nature, all things considered. What holds of
individuals holds of masses of individuals; and hence the inhabitants
of a tract offering facilities for a particular occupation fall into
that occupation. In § 732 of the _Principles of Sociology_ I have
given from various countries illustrations of the ways in which local
conditions determine the local industries:--instance among ourselves
mining districts where there are coal, ironstone, lead, slate;
wheat-growing districts and pastoral districts; fruit and hop districts;
districts for weavers, stockingers, workers in iron; places for
shipbuilding, importing, fishing, etc.: showing that certain sections
of the population become turned into organizations for the production
of certain commodities, without reference to the directive agency of
any man. So in each case is it with the various classes of merchants,
shopkeepers, professional men, etc., who in each of these centers
minister to those engaged in its special industries: nobody ordering
them to come or to go.

Similarly when we pass from production to distribution. As in India at
the present time, where a Juggernaut festival is accompanied by a vast
fair; as, according to Curtius and Mommsen, in Greece and Rome, the
gatherings of people to make sacrifices to the gods were the occasions
for trading; so in Christian times, church festivals and saints' days,
drawing assemblages of people for worship, led to active exchange of
commodities--the names of the fairs proving their origin. This was not
arranged by any one: it arose from the common sense of all who wanted
to sell some things and buy others. There has been a like history for
the rise of markets, and the transition from weekly to bi-weekly,
and finally to daily, markets in respect of important things--corn,
money, securities. No superior man, political or other, dictated these
developments. When barter gave place to exchange by means of a currency,
the like happened. One wanting to dispose of surplus goods, meeting
those who had no personal need for such goods, took in exchange certain
things in universal demand, which he knew he would be able to pass on in
like manner--in early stages articles of food, of warmth, of defense,
of ornament; and from such articles arose in each case a currency--here
dried fish, there tea-bricks, and in other cases skins, bundles of
cotton, here standard bars of rock salt, there standard bars of iron,
in one place definite lengths of cloth, and in another fine mats, and
in many places ornaments and the materials for ornaments: which last,
gold and silver, being relatively portable, passed into wide use. These
precious metals were at first in quantities actually weighed; then in
quantities of professed weight; and finally in quantities bearing the
king's stamp as being the most trustworthy. No great man--political,
industrial, or other--invented this system. It has everywhere resulted
from men's efforts to satisfy their needs in the easiest ways. So was
it with the transition from a currency of intrinsic value to one of
representative value. When, instead of a direct payment in coin, there
came to be used a memorandum of indebtedness to be presently discharged,
which could be transferred to others--when, as in Italy, to save the
weighing and testing of miscellaneous coins, there arose the practice
of depositing specified quantities with a custodian and having from
him negotiable receipts--when, as in England, the merchants, after
having been robbed by the king of their valuables, left for security in
the Tower, sought safer places, and, depositing them in the vaults of
goldsmiths, received in return "goldsmiths' notes," which could pass
from hand to hand; there was initiated a paper-currency. Goldsmiths
developed into bankers; after central banks there arose provincial
banks; promises to pay became to a great extent substitutes for actual
payments; and presently grew up the supplementary system of checks,
extensively serving in place of coin and notes. Finally, bank-clerks
in London, instead of presenting to the respective banks the many and
various claims upon them, met and exchanged these claims and settled
the balance: whence presently came the clearing house. No superior
man arranged all this. Each further stage was prompted by the desire
to economize labor. From primitive fairs up to the daily transactions
of the money market, distribution and exchange have developed without
the dictation of any great man, either of Mr. Carlyle's sort or of
Mr. Mallock's sort. It has been so throughout all other arrangements
subserving national life, even the governmental. Though here at least
it seems that the individual will and power play the largest part,
yet it is otherwise. I do not merely refer to the fact that without
loyalty in citizens a ruler can have no power; and that so the supremacy
of a man intrinsically or conventionally great is an outcome of the
average nature; but I refer to the fact that governmental evolution is
essentially a result of social necessities. On tracing its earliest
stages from savage life upwards, it becomes manifest that even a
ministry is not the mere invention of a king. It arises everywhere
from that augmentation of business which goes along with increase of
territory and authority: entailing the necessity for deputing more and
more work. Under its special aspect it seems to be wholly a result of
the king's private action, but under its general aspect it is seen to
be determined by the conditions of his existence. And it is so with
governmental institutions at large. Without tracing these further it
will suffice to quote the saying of Macintosh--"Constitutions are not
made but grow."

       *       *       *       *       *

Of course inequalities of nature and consequent inequalities of relative
position are factors in social changes. Of course, as implied above,
any assertion of the approximate equality of human beings, save in the
sense that they are beings having sets of faculties common to them all,
is absurd; and it is equally absurd to suppose that the unlikenesses
which exist are without effects on social life. I have pointed out that
in the earliest stages of social evolution, when war is the business of
life, the supremacy of a leader or chief, or primitive king, is a fact
of cardinal importance; and also that the initiator of ecclesiastical
control is necessarily distinguished from others "by knowledge and
intellectual capacity." The beginnings of industrial evolution are also
ascribed by me to differences of individual capacity; as instance the
following quotations from that part of the _Principles of Sociology_
which deals with Industrial Institutions.

     The natural selection of occupations has for its primary
     cause certain original differences between individuals, partly
     physical, partly psychical. Let us for brevity's sake call this the
     physio-psychological cause (§ 730).

     That among the fully civilized there are in like manner
     specializations of function caused by natural aptitudes, needs
     no showing: professions and crafts are often thus determined ...
     occupations of relatively skilled kinds having fallen into the
     hands of the most intelligent (§ 731).

     Speaking generally, the man who, among primitive peoples,
     becomes ruler, is at once a man of power and a man of sagacity: his
     sagacity being in large measure the cause of his supremacy. We may
     therefore infer that as his political rule, though chiefly guided
     by his own interests, is in part guided by the interests of his
     people, so his industrial rule, though having for its first end to
     enrich himself, has for its second end the prosperity of industry
     at large. It is a fair inference that on the average his greater
     knowledge expresses itself in orders which seem, and sometimes are,
     beneficial (§ 770).

     In its beginnings slavery commonly implies some kind of
     inferiority (§ 795).

     Considered as a form of industrial regulation, slavery has
     been natural to early stages of conflicts and consolidations (§
     800).

     The rise of slavery exhibits in its primary form the
     differentiation of the regulative part of a society from the
     operative part (§ 798).

The recognition of these effects of individual differences, especially
in early stages, may rightly go along with the assertion that all
the large traits of social structure are otherwise determined--that
all those great components of a society which carry on the various
industries, making the life of the whole possible, all those
specialized classes which have established and maintained the
inter-dependence of the producing structures, by facilitating and
regulating the exchange of their products, have arisen from the play
of aggregate forces, constituted of men's desires directed by their
respective sets of circumstances. Mr. Mallock alleges that the great
fact of human inequality--the fact that there is a minority "more
gifted and efficient than the majority"--is the fundamental fact from
which "the main structural characteristics of all civilized societies
spring."[10] That he should assert this in presence of all the evidence
which the _Principles of Sociology_ puts before him, is, to use the
weakest word, surprising. If his assertion be true, however, the way of
demonstrating its truth lies open before him. In volumes II. and III. of
the _Principles of Sociology_, several groups of institutions, presented
by every developed society, are dealt with under the heads, Political,
Ecclesiastical, Professional, Industrial: seventy-one chapters being
included in them. Each chapter treats of some aspect, some division or
subdivision, of the phenomena grouped under the general head. Instead
of the Industrial Institutions discussed above, suppose that Mr.
Mallock takes a group not touched upon--Professional Institutions. The
thesis worked out in the part so entitled is that all the professions
are differentiated from the priesthood; and the differentiation is
tacitly represented as due to the slow operation of those natural
causes which lead to specializations of function throughout the whole
social aggregate. If Mr. Mallock is right, then of the chapters dealing
with the ten professions enumerated, each is wrong by omitting to say
anything about the great man, political, industrial, or other, who set
up the differentiation or from time to time consciously gave it a more
pronounced character--who thought that it would be well that there
should be a separate medical class, or a separate teaching class, or a
separate artist class, and then carried his thought into effect. Mr.
Mallock's course is simply to take each of these chapters and show how,
by the recognition of the supplementary factor on which he insists, the
conclusions of the chapter are transformed. If he does this he will do
more than by merely asserting that my views of social evolution are
wrong because the "great fact of human inequality" "is systematically
and ostentatiously ignored."

       *       *       *       *       *

If in his title Mr. Mallock had, instead of "Evolution," written Social
Sustentation, the general argument of his book would have been valid.
If, further, he had alleged that social sustentation is instrumental
to social evolution, and that in the absence of processes facilitating
social sustentation social evolution can not take place, no one could
have gainsaid his conclusion. And if he had inferred that whoever
improves these processes betters the conditions which favor social
evolution, his inference would have been true. But this admission may be
made without admitting that the men who directly or indirectly further
sustentation, or who improve the quality of the social units, are the
agents who determine and direct social evolution. An account of their
doings in no way constitutes an account of that social transformation
from an indefinite incoherent homogeneity to a definite coherent
heterogeneity, in which the evolution of a society essentially consists.

Moreover Mr. Mallock is justified in contending that the great
man--discoverer, inventor, teacher, administrator, or other--may
equitably receive all the reward which, under the principle of contract,
flows to him as the result of his superiority; and that disregard of his
claim by the mass of men is alike inequitable and ungrateful. This is
the position I have myself taken, as witness the following:--

     Even were an invention of no benefit to society unless thrown
     open to unbought use, there would still be no just ground for
     disregarding the inventor's claim; any more than for disregarding
     the claim of one who labors on his farm for his own benefit and
     not for public benefit. But as it is, society unavoidably gains
     immensely more than the inventor gains. Before he can receive
     any advantage from his new process or apparatus, he must confer
     advantages on his fellow men--must either supply them with a
     better article at the price usually charged, or the same article
     at a lower price. If he fails to do this, his invention is a dead
     letter; if he does it, he makes over to the world at large nearly
     all the new mine of wealth he has opened. By the side of the
     profits which came to Watt from his patents, place the profits
     which his improvements in the steam-engine have since brought to
     his own nation and to all nations, and it becomes manifest that the
     inventor's share is infinitesimal compared with the share mankind
     takes. And yet there are not a few who would appropriate even his
     infinitesimal share![11]

Had Mr. Mallock recognized the fundamental distinction I have pointed
out between social sustentation, life, activity, enlightenment, etc.,
on the one hand, and the development of social structures on the other,
his polemic against socialists and collectivists would have been equally
effective, and he would not have entailed upon me an expenditure of time
and energy which I can ill spare.--_The Nineteenth Century._

FOOTNOTES:

[4] Nineteenth Century, p. 316.

[5] Aristocracy and Evolution, pp. 52, 53. The italics are his.

[6] Literature, April 2, 1898.

[7] Westminster Review, April, 1857.

[8] Aristocracy and Evolution, pp. 5, 7.

[9] Ibid., pp. 10, 11.

[10] Nineteenth Century, pp. 314, 315.

[11] Justice, pp. 110, 111.




THE TORRENTS OF SWITZERLAND.

BY EDGAR E. DAWSON, M. E.


Mark Twain once said that he was in constant expectation in Switzerland
of seeing a farmer fall out of his farm. The farmer has in many cases
appreciated his hazardous position when harvesting his crops, and has
put on crampoons to prevent a precipitous trip into the valley below.
The crampoons prevent the farmer leaving his farm in such an undignified
manner, but they do not prevent that same farm leaving its position
on the mountain side. To show how, in many cases, the mountain sides
are kept intact is the object of this paper. The old simile, "I am as
sure of it as of the ground on which I stand," would be as much out of
place in some parts of Switzerland as in those parts of the world where
earthquakes are endemic. In fact, in these latter places, though the
surface may receive a good shaking, it generally returns to somewhat the
same neighborhood after its nervous peregrinations are over. Not so with
the Swiss mountain side. When part of the mountain takes leave of the
rest, it is forever.

Switzerland is often spoken of somewhat derisively as a garden, so
perfectly have its pleasure grounds been laid out, and so completely
comfortable does one find one's self in the midst of Nature's grandeurs.
If its water courses had not been controlled and cared for as are
those of a well-conducted park it would be chaos! The constant and
vigilant struggle the Swiss have been forced to maintain against
the liquid element is much to their credit, for they have generally
been victorious. They have spent enormous sums of money in keeping
their torrents and rivers within reasonable limits, and are even
now, at times, forced to suppress new insurrections on the part of
these irresponsible agents. The corrections of the water courses have
been necessary for several reasons. In the first place, the erosions
on the mountain sides result in deposits which present different
inconveniences, of which I shall speak later. In the second place, the
erosions are frequently the cause of landslides. The work of regulating
the action of the water courses is now done according to accepted rules
based on experience and on theories which have been confirmed by facts.
Years ago, before the confederation took charge of this matter, it was
done often in a haphazard, empirical fashion by the local authorities,
with or without the aid of an engineer. But some great disasters in
the canton of Grisons awakened the people to what might occur to many
of them who had hitherto been more fortunate. At the end of September,
1868, both slopes of the Alps, and particularly the cantons of Valais
and Grisons, were visited by floods of enormous magnitude. Such was
the devastation caused that an appeal was made to the generosity of
the nation at large in behalf of the sufferers. This was responded to
with such liberality that a large portion of the sum subscribed was put
aside for the purpose of improving the water courses permanently. The
fact that collective action was necessary in the attempts to control the
turbulent streams became very apparent. This being the case, the state
was called upon to take charge of this colossal enterprise. In July,
1871, by federal decree, the confederation declared that the correction
and extinction of torrents was a matter of public utility, and worthy
of the subsidies of the national Government. At the same time the
relative burdens of the cantons and the confederation were settled. The
importance of the improvement of the water courses and of the wooding
of the regions where they rise was recognized in the Constitution of
1874. There the matter was definitely put under federal control and
classed with the allied question of the conservation of the forests.
The problem of keeping the waters under control in Switzerland ranges
from the marshy lowlands to the summits of the passes. In spite of the
varying conditions that this range entails, there are certain general
principles that bear on all cases where the water is in movement. As the
Swiss supplies his want of coal by harnessing his streams, so he makes
the water do a large share of the work of correcting its erring ways and
preparing itself to be harnessed. This he does by utilizing its power of
carrying or depositing stones and soil, according as it is held within
narrow banks or allowed to roam at will. As this power depends also
on the steepness of the slope down which it runs, he uses this latter
factor as well.

When he has got the water courses into what he considers good working
condition and one that should be permanent, he tries to clinch
matters. This is done by so combining the various conditions of
cross-section, slope, and quality of soil that the action of the water
is automatic--that is, it brings down no more earth and stones than
it is capable of carrying below to safer places where the dangers of
floods are small. Whenever the force with which the water moves along
is stronger than the cohesion of the soil, erosion occurs. This erosion
will continue, the channel of the stream becoming ever deeper, until
a soil is encountered whose resistance is equal to the erosive action
of the water. As the alluvion is carried on, the slope of the stream
will become steeper and steeper the higher one goes. This circumstance
would be of much greater importance if the gorges and gullies in which
most of the streams run were not so well provided with rock. The power
of the water to cause erosion is lessened in proportion to the amount
of material it is carrying with it, which material is generally the
product of previous erosions. Whenever the current needs all its
strength to carry the material it has in suspension, together with the
solid matter it is pushing along, it will have lost all its power to
cause erosion. If the slope is decreased, or if the matter in suspension
is increased in any manner, deposits will occur. These deposits render
the slope less steep at that point but steeper below, so that the action
of the water beyond will make itself felt, and by digging gradually up
stream tend to restore the original slope.

In some cases there is very little erosion where the current is much
stronger than the cohesive power of the soil, for the reason that the
beds of the streams have been almost paved with stones that have been
carried along by the propulsive action of the water.

This has in many cases produced an equilibrium between the resistance
and the destroying power; in others the equilibrium has been brought
about in a different way by the same natural agents. The current of a
stream will very often go on causing erosion until arrested by some
rocky obstacle that determines a waterfall. These falls cause breaks in
the action of the water not only in stopping the erosive action in its
upward march, but also in checking the velocity of the water. Then, as
basins are often formed just above the falls and where the current is
much less swift, matter in suspension is deposited, so that when the
stream is swollen it has material to work upon, before starting to make
the original slope steeper.

The subject divides itself broadly into two branches--the extinction
of torrents and the correction of the water courses in valleys. In the
extinction of the torrents various plans are resorted to, which give
the current greater propulsive power, but at the same time they render
necessary greater protection of the bed. This may be done by incasing
it within walls of masonry (though other materials are used in some
cases) or shortening meandering portions. In the latter plan the slope
is increased, the fall being the same for a shorter distance. Currents
that have been making dangerous deposits at certain points and causing
dangerous erosions at others are treated by the above systems until the
danger has disappeared or the money has given out. When the erosive
action of the water is already too great, the material carried and then
deposited by the stream is often made use of to consolidate banks that
are threatened. Spurs are built out from such banks, and this tends to
mend matters not only in forcing the water to take another channel, but
also in causing deposits at the foot of the menaced bank.

The destructive effects of the current are arrested when the streams
are not important by means of dams made of trunks of trees and wooden
stakes, often strengthened roughly with stones. Where the streams are
larger, and where the erosive action can not be modified by enlarging
the channel, as is the case in many gorges, it is necessary to make an
artificial bed for the stream and at times to supplement this by masonry
dams. The dams are not permanent in their effects, for as soon as the
basin immediately above the dam has been filled with deposits and the
original slope of the stream has re-established itself, the products of
the erosion pass over the dam. They prove, however, of great utility
at times of large freshets by causing deposits which are subsequently
carried down in much smaller quantities. This prevents the disasters
that would be caused by sudden enormous deposits when the streams are
swollen.

The prospect for many a narrow valley would be a sad one indeed if means
had not been taken to prevent the lateral erosions so common with the
mountain torrents and so productive of landslips. Where the stream has
provided itself with a stony bed on which to roll, it often tries to do
damage by leaving the stones and attacking the earthy banks. It is in
these cases that the danger has proved so insidious; for until disasters
actually occurred, in many instances, the undermining effect of the
water was not suspected, being entirely hidden from view.

The most economical way of combating such cases is by making use of
those points that by their formation arrest the erosive action. This
is done by re-enforcing them in such manner as to produce a series of
natural steps. The upward march of the excavating action of the water
is stopped at least partially and temporarily at each step. Such a
method is of great advantage when it is necessary to delay a more costly
correction for financial reasons.

The experience gained since a connected system was begun in the
management of the water courses has been of incalculable value, and many
have been the landslips arrested and prevented by seeking their causes
in the hidden erosive action of a small stream. In still another manner
does the water threaten the mountain sides, and that is by permeating
the soil (which is thus rendered much heavier), until it reaches a bed
of rock or other layer that it can not penetrate. There it forms a
layer of slippery mud on which the soil above slides bodily down. The
method pursued in such cases is sometimes that of a ditch dug to the
impermeable layer, sometimes that of a drain. In both cases there may
or may not be small feeding ditches. Another plan which appears very
contradictory of what has just been said is also employed. This consists
in preventing, by means of horizontal trenches, the water from flowing
off on the surface in the regions above the timber line. The water is
forced to percolate through the soil and so reaches the wooded portions,
where it would permeate anyhow, much more gradually than otherwise. The
soil thus escapes the enormous increase of pressure due to the sudden
absorption of great quantities of water, and consequently is less in
danger of leaving its fastenings.

One of the most difficult of the problems that these torrents give
rise to is that of their control where they suddenly enter a valley,
and where the slope is consequently greatly decreased. The decrease of
current entailed causes the deposit of stones and material at the mouth
of the gorge, and the water then spreads itself over the valley. This
occurs more or less regularly with certain torrents that are usually dry
and where it is impracticable to prevent the erosions above. It then
becomes necessary to build a stone canal from the mouth of the gorge
to the principal water course of the valley. As this must be built on
the alluvion (which presents the surface of a cone), it is often higher
than the rest of the valley, and one may find other small canals for
the draining of the valley passing under the larger one and meeting
the principal stream below. A similar action to that of the torrent on
entering the valley is that of a stream with a rapid current emptying
into one whose current is slower. Here the deposits will at times
force the smaller stream to seek another channel, and it frequently
occurs that the correction moves the mouth of the stream a considerable
distance.

The manner in which the streams in the valleys are made to aid in their
own correction is most interesting. Whereas in the mountains it is
usually desirable to decrease the erosive action of the water, in the
valleys the contrary is the case, as the deposits in the lowlands are as
dangerous to life and property as was their abstraction above. The great
desideratum to be attained is to have the mountain streams arrive in the
valleys in a purely liquid condition, and to give the valley streams
the power to carry to the lakes any material they may be so unfortunate
as to have taken in charge. To accomplish this latter purpose, the
sinuosities of the streams are often reduced to straight lines, an
increase of slope being thus secured. The new channels are made of a
cross-section to enable the water to carry on its alluvion and silt.
Where great freshets occur it is necessary to guarantee the artificial
beds against the enormous increase of the water's destructive action.

The usual plan is that of having the cross-section of the stream with
a deep depression in the center. This depression is of dimensions
to insure a proper flow under ordinary conditions. When the stream
becomes swollen it overflows the borders of this depression and spreads
over a much larger area until the banks proper are encountered. This
sudden increase of cross-section reduces the velocity of the water and
consequently its destructive power. When the water of a stream is
turned from its old channel into the new one that has been prepared for
it, the operation is generally very gradually performed, so as to enable
the water to fill up the old bed as much as possible by depositing its
silt.

A plan pursued with much success is that of building out from the
high bank of a stream (which it is desired to confine into a narrower
channel) insubmersible spurs, stopping at the points where the new bank
is to be situated. The water flowing in between these spurs deposits its
dirt and gravel, and gradually builds up the new bank. In many cases the
ends of the spurs are connected by low artificial banks of masonry over
which the water flows. These banks retain and protect the deposits, and,
when the latter have attained a sufficient depth, the artificial banks
are raised to their permanent height. Still another method pursued with
the same object in view is that of starting up stream and building the
banks to their permanent height until a point is reached where it is
desired to "fill." Here the artificial banks are left temporarily very
low. The water overflows them, and the reduction of its velocity entails
the deposit of its silt. When this has continued as long as necessary or
practicable, the walls are raised to their permanent height along the
section and the same process is repeated below. This gradual process
is also very advantageous from a financial point of view. When the
engineer finally reaches the mouth of the stream at one of the lakes,
we should expect to find his difficulties at an end, as the lakes are
usually so deep that the alluvion makes little impression on them, and
their areas are such that floods are not much to be feared. But he is
confronted here with a new difficulty, that of anchoring or securing the
foundation of his artificial river bank. The soil is generally alluvial
over a large area, and is very damp. He generally has to terminate the
masonry before he reaches the less stable alluvial soil and continue the
structure by means of wooden material, which retains its position much
better under such circumstances and is more cheaply replaced. It would
be natural to imagine that man's control of the water problem stops at
this point. But not so with the Swiss; he even controls its exit from
some of the lakes. This is notably the case at Geneva, where by means of
ingenious dams the lake is maintained at what is deemed a proper level.
When it is remembered that this lake is fifty miles long by ten broad,
an idea is gained of the amount of water controlled. Every few years the
level is lowered for a given period, so that repairs may be made to the
walls and structures along the shores.




THE EVOLUTION OF COLONIES.

BY JAMES COLLIER.


V.--POLITICAL EVOLUTION.

The law that the evolution of a colony repeats the evolution of the
parent state would here be logically applied to the history of the
relations between colonies and the mother country. These would be
shown to have followed a similar course, though with new developments,
to those of the mother country with _her_ suzerain; and they would
be carried further back and deeper down to those universal animal
processes of lactation and rearing which they continue and which explain
them. The gradual settlement of a new country would next be exhibited
as a repetition (with necessary modifications) of the settlement of
the mother country, because guided by the same general laws--that
it dispossesses an earlier race, which had followed quadrupeds and
birds, which had followed trees, shrubs, and grasses, which again had
sown themselves along geographical lines. Chapters on both topics are
unavoidably omitted. The law has now to be applied to the political,
industrial, and social evolution of colonies. In so wide a subject only
_aperçus_ are possible.

There are traces in several colonies of a state anterior to the
establishment of a settled government. According to the unloving
Hobbes, such a state is necessarily one of war, and it is sometimes
that; according to the humane Rousseau, it is one of peace, and, to
the credit of human nature, it is oftener that. There were English
settlers in Pennsylvania before the Swedes arrived. The first immigrants
to Plymouth found predecessors on the coast who owed no allegiance.
Seventy years after the foundation of North Carolina the inhabitants
still led the lives of freemen in the woods. Prior to 1702 New Jersey
was considered one of those provinces "where no regular government had
been established." The Tasmanian farmers who colonized Victoria lived
for some time without any form of government, and lived peacefully.
Pastoralists were found on the Canterbury plains before the advent of
the Pilgrims, and were content. When the Pilgrims got into collision
with the central government, they said bitterly that they would
do better with none. Where it is otherwise the circumstances are
exceptional. Gold and silver fields everywhere are at first, and often
to the last, scenes of wild disorder, where a man's safety depends on
his ability to defend himself. Escaped Australian convicts, runaway
sailors, adventurers, and natives made up a community which turned the
natural paradise of the Bay of Islands into an earthly hell. Parts of
Texas in very recent days were the seat of anarchy. Government soon
arrives on the spot in the shape of the Texas Rangers, the Draconian
gold-fields mounted police, or a royal governor. Or an organized body
of immigrants absorbs previous settlers and evolves from within itself
all the agencies of government. On one or other of these two types
all colonial societies have been built up. The patriarchal theory
of Filmer is realized in those colonies--the great majority--where
the government is clothed with power delegated by the sovereign of
the mother country. The socialist theory of Locke is embodied in the
New England colonies; in the Carolina "Association" of 1719; in the
resolutions of the Liberal Association of Canada in 1841, which issued
in the compact between the crown and the Canadian people; in the New
Zealand whalers in 1840, governed by their own laws; in the New Zealand
Company's settlements (with a social contract previously drawn up by
the passengers, as by those of the Mayflower); and in the colonies of
Otago and Canterbury, and New Australia in Paraguay. Two intermediate
groups have a transitional existence. Many colonies have been founded
by commercial companies whose collective history might be written in
two lines--inception of vast enterprises, partial commercial success,
great collateral benefits, ruinous loss of capital, surrender of
charter to the crown. A set of colonies peculiar to the United States
were established by one or more proprietaries, from whose voluntary
concessions the form of government was derived, but most of these
merged, after a series of conflicts, in the popular group. They were
respectively bastard royal and bastard charter colonies.

From the origin of a colony is deducible its whole political and social
structure. Colonies of royal foundation, by a kind of moral pangenesis,
tend to reproduce all parts of the mother country that are suitable to
the new environment--its inequalities of _rank_, governors who are the
image of the sovereign, an executive, legislative, and judicature that
are the delegation of his authority. But these institutions must grow;
they can not be made. The attempt to create an aristocracy in Carolina,
and the proposal to manufacture one in New South Wales, necessarily
failed. Yet in both countries one grew or is growing up. In the South
there was an untitled aristocracy, with the aristocratic temper,
exclusive institutions, and four distinct classes (the descendants
of the lords of the manor, villeins or tenants, bond-servants,
and slaves, who had a brief existence in Virginia, Carolina, and
Maryland)--planters, overseers, mean whites, and negro slaves; the fall
of Richmond saw the happy ending of all that. In the British colonies,
as in England, there is an increasing passion for titles, and of about
sixty grades in the Byzantine hierarchy of the English monarchy at
least eleven have been transplanted to colonial soil. But it is on
one condition, abroad as at home--that honor shall be divorced from
power. In England the nobility is being edged out of office, and on Lord
Salisbury's grave might be written, "The last of the nobles"--the last
who governed his country. In her colonies one premier after another
resolutely refuses the forbidden dignity that would banish him from
the ministerial Eden. The same point has been reached in the United
States from the opposite side. Most of the charter and some of the
proprietary colonies developed into republican societies, with political
equality as their badge, a popular legislature, an elected judiciary,
and a half-elected executive. Side by side with this democracy of power
there has grown up in the great cities--Philadelphia, Boston, New
York--an aristocracy of blood, culture, or dollars. This aristocracy of
fashion--as in France and England, so in the United States and (on a
small scale) in Australia--consoles itself for lifelong exclusion from
public affairs by addicting itself to literature, art, philanthropy,
and such like. But these are only its recreations. Its chief use is to
exist, to exhibit the civilization of a people at its flower, to give
pleasure to others and to itself. The proportion of this element to the
rest of the population will measure the age of the community.

The core of the _executive_ is the governor. The governor of the
monarchical colonies is the deputy of the sovereign, and the story
of his authority is the story in brief of the royal prerogative. The
governors of the Spanish colonies arrogated and abused a power far more
despotic than a Spanish king's. The French Governor of Illinois ruled
with absolute sway. The first Governor of New South Wales exercised
unparalleled powers. He could inflict five hundred lashes and impose a
five-hundred-pound fine; could sentence to death, execute, or pardon.
He regulated trade. He fixed prices, wages, and customs duties. All the
labor in the colony was at his disposal. He could bestow grants of land.
He appointed to all offices of honor or emolument. The administration of
justice was exclusively in his hands. The colonists were his subjects.
He was practically irresponsible. Thus an Anglo-Saxon community can
take on the characters of an Oriental satrapy. It can also become a
military despotism. For some years after the departure of one governor
and the deposition of another the government of the colony was in the
hands, or under the feet, of the officers of the New South Wales Corps,
who ruled it as the Sultan rules Turkey. The stage of pure absolutism,
which is necessitated in a colony, as in the mother country, by the
existence of a small band of immigrants in the midst of a hostile
indigenous population, or of a small number of free settlers among
a convict populace, is succeeded by that of limited absolutism. The
authority of the governor is checked by the appointment of a council.
Most of the early North American crown colonies were at this stage.
It answers to England under the later Tudors, and, as there, left
ample scope for oppression. Occasionally it blossomed or withered into
prodigies of tyranny on a small scale, as in the too celebrated Andros.
Sir James Craig, so lately as the beginning of the nineteenth century,
treated his Canadian Parliament as superciliously as a Stuart. In New
Zealand there were continual complaints that a certain governor had more
absolute power than a sovereign. In South Australia and South Africa
the same governor ruled like an emperor, his council not thwarting but
aggrandizing his authority. This second preconstitutional stage is
often unduly prolonged in colonies, as it commonly is in the mother
country, on the pretext of an enemy on the frontier or of troubles
with the natives, but really because of the forceful character of a
governor who is unwilling to lay down the dignity he may not have been
overwilling to take up. Its persistence in the North American colonies
can only be explained on Haeckel's principle that the development
of ancestral species is followed in the development of the embryo.
Despotism in the Old World was the parent of despotism in the New.
There is no other reason why colonies ripe for self-government, like
Massachusetts, New York, and Virginia, should have been oppressed by
such men as Andros, Cornbury, and Harvey. The stage is ended by the
granting of a constitution or by a successful rebellion. The governor's
personal force will then be the measure of his power. The sagacious
and resolute Lord Elgin asserted that he had twice the authority in
constitutional Canada that he had enjoyed in Jamaica. Such a governor
is the colonial analogue of Queen Victoria, who, in consequence of her
association with the Prince Consort, the length of her reign, and her
strong character, has prolonged monarchical influence. But the day of
such sovereigns is passing; the day of such governors is past. The
office is by no means shorn of its prerogatives. The governor, like the
sovereign, selects his prime minister, and the act may have serious
consequences; the appeal of the minister for election as leader by his
party shows the blending of the popular with the monarchical strain,
but it is little more than formal. As George III in 1783, and William
IV in 1834, arbitrarily dismissed the Whigs, a Governor of Newfoundland
in 1861 dismissed his ministry; in 1858 the Governor of New South Wales
had resolved to dismiss his; and it is not many months since Mr. Rhodes
was cashiered. Like the sovereign, the governor sometimes refuses to
grant a dissolution. Like the Governor General of Canada last year, or
the Governor of New Zealand a few years ago, he may refuse to appoint
senators--successfully in the one case or only to be bowled over by the
Colonial Office in the other. Beyond these real but rarely exercised
prerogatives he has little else to do than sign his ministers'
documents. He ought to interfere in certain cabinet crises, but dares
not. His power, like that of the sovereign, is reduced to a shadow. The
premier of the colony is now its working king.

As the governor's authority wanes, his dignity waxes. After 1632 a
viceroy of high rank was sent to New Spain. In 1867 Disraeli, half
genius and half charlatan, commenced a policy of ostentation by
announcing that only those would in future be appointed colonial
governors who had been "born in the purple," or were peers, and
notwithstanding two or three Liberal reactions the policy has been
confirmed, in regard to all the more important colonies, by the demands
of the colonists. On arriving in his dominions the new ruler has a
royal reception. He becomes the head of the ceremonial system in the
colony, and if he ceases to govern he reigns (according to Bagehot's
theory of the monarchy) by impressing the popular imagination. And as
loyalty to the Queen is passing into loyalty to the imperial tradition,
so is loyalty to her representative being transmuted into the pride of
imperial connection.

The governor completes the parallel with sovereignty by undergoing all
its vicissitudes. As monarchs have abdicated, been imprisoned, banished,
restored, tried, and beheaded, colonial governors have resigned,
been imprisoned, expelled, recalled, restored, impeached, dismissed,
and hanged, and in both sets of cases for similar reasons. They have
resigned because of ill usage at the hands of their ministers, because
things were done in their absence of which they disapproved, or because
they were entrapped into approving of their ministers' wrongdoing. La
Bourdonnais was sent to the Bastille, Andros was imprisoned for tyranny
in Massachusetts, and in North Carolina it was the "common practice"
to resist and imprison their governors. Depositions were frequent in
the North American colonies. An oppressive Governor of Virginia was
banished to England, but sent back; a Governor of New South Wales was
deposed for rectitude by a military mutiny and shipped to Tasmania; a
Governor of New Zealand was placed on board a ship for England because
he had excited the ill will of a powerful company, and had indiscreetly
realized the dream of free traders by making the colony a free port. As
Pericles dreaded being ostracized, early Governors of New South Wales
feared being placed under arrest. Recall is the sentence that governors
of British colonies had most to shun in the days when they were still
irresponsible. The first four Governors of Australia, and possibly
the sixth, were lied out of office. One was recalled because of the
financial embarrassments of his colony and his own devotion to science;
another, on the better grounds of tyranny and red tape. A Governor of
the Cape of Good Hope was recalled because he was unpopular. Another
governor of that colony was recalled for incorrigible insubordination,
and again, when he had been pardoned and sent to a more distant colony,
for hopeless incompatibility. How so serious a step may be contrived by
a mere clerk in the Colonial Office may be read in the autobiography of
Sir Henry Taylor, who procured the recall of an obnoxious governor by
submitting to a compliant Secretary of State a dispatch recalling him.
An outbreak of public indignation, like that against Governor Eyre,
may be needed to bring about the same result. Dupleix and Frontenac
fell before the machinations of their enemies, and the former was
allowed to die in misery. Hastings was impeached. Articles equivalent
to impeachment were drawn up against a Governor of New South Wales,
who, like Clive, suffered the indignity of having his administration
scrutinized by a committee of the House of Commons. Lastly, as a single
English king was brought to the block, so has a single governor, and he
the creature of an insurrection, expiated his rebellion on the scaffold.

The election of governors recalls the election of Frankish kings, but
really repeats that of the governors of commercial companies; how
powerful such elected functionaries may become is shown by the chairman
of an English railway company and the American boss. Leaders like Smith
or Winthrop, Cargill of Otago, or Godley of Canterbury, who give to
young colonies cohesion and the power to survive, or carry them through
perils, are their rulers by indefeasible sovereignty; in form they may,
as in Massachusetts, be only the presidents of the company out of which
the colony has sprung. Re-elected for twenty years, like Winthrop,
or thirteen, like Endicott, they may confer on the office a duration
equal to that of inheritance, and may show an independence greater than
a hereditary or an appointed officer can safely assume. Creators of
colonies, like Baltimore, Penn, and Oglethorpe, repeat a type that must
be rare in history, if indeed they do not originate the noblest of all
types of ruler, and are kings by a diviner right than that of any known
sovereign.

The governor being the brain (or the active portion of the brain)
of the body politic, the _administration_ is his limbs, and expands
from him with such improvements as new circumstances permit and such
modifications as they require, in the same manner as it had done from
the sovereign in the mother country. Not that each colony passes through
all the stages through which the latter pass; that depends on the date
at which the colony was given off. Massachusetts and Virginia alone
of the North American colonies, New South Wales and Tasmania alone of
the Australasian, described most of them; in the younger colonies the
earlier ones were dropped. Thus (to mention a single point) the office
of Colonial Secretary (who was originally the governor's secretary,
as the Secretary for Ireland, till the other day, was only the Lord
Lieutenant's secretary) differentiates into several ministries, as the
department of Secretary of State had differentiated in England. An
anomaly is worth noting. In the United States, where the whole people is
the fountain of power, the ministers are the servants of the President,
appointed and dismissed by him. In England, while they are still in
theory her Majesty's ministers, and the Prime Minister is nominally
selected by the sovereign, by a remarkable transformation they have
become the servants of the legislature--that is, of the people. The two
countries have exchanged institutions, as Hamlet and Laertes exchanged
rapiers. The explanation is historical. The United States parted from
the development of Britain at a time when the executive was, far more
than now, independent of the legislature and dependent on the sovereign.
The framers of the Constitution of the United States, looking at the
British Constitution from without, and ignoring the subtle checks and
balances that gave the lie to Montesquieu's too rigid trichotomy,
petrified a still developing system, and dug a gulf between the
executive and the legislature. But in England, with the growing weakness
of the crown and the growing strength of the legislature, the ministers
have gone over to the popular side. The younger British colonies were
founded at a time when this development was already far advanced, and
they have repeated the evolution. A curious consequence ensues. While
in a monarchical country and its colonies a manifestation of public
opinion can in a week bring the most powerful ministry to its knees, the
President and ministers of a popularly governed country pursue their
irresponsible course in apparent indifference to either pulpit or press.

A similar cleavage divides the _legislative_ structure. The governor of
crown colonies, like the sovereign, is at first the sole, and through
his ministers to the last the chief, legislator; the legislature is
created by concessions wrung from him, and its history is the record
of successive limitations of his authority. In charter colonies the
legislature is the creation of the people, and the laws are made by its
deputies. A single tolerably perfect example of each type is chosen.
The early history of New South Wales is one of the best preserved
specimens in the museum of political paleontology. During its earliest
years the governor was as absolute as the first Norman sovereigns.
William Rufus might ask: "You Taillebois, what have you to propose in
this arduous matter?... Potdevin, what is your opinion of the measure?"
And Philip, hunter or king, might as unceremoniously solicit the advice
of the chaplain or the commander of the forces, but they were under no
obligation to take it; and the earliest laws, like the capitularies
of Charlemagne, were public orders or proclamations. Under the sixth
governor, when civilian officials had arrived, his authority received
its first limitation: a small council was instituted, consisting of the
chief justice, the attorney general, and the archdeacon of Sydney. A few
years later the council was enlarged by the inclusion of new officials,
and an equal number of unofficial citizens, who were, however, nominated
by the crown. So far, we are still in the twelfth English century. In
1828 began fourteen years of agitation for an elective council, and with
1842 we arrive at the colonial Magna Charta. The concession had hardly
been made when, with the influx of fresh settlers, another agitation for
all the rights of self-government was begun. It was complicated with
the convict question, as the politics of the United States was long
complicated with the slavery question, but was not settled with, though
it may have been accelerated by, the settlement of that in 1848. Eight
years later full self-government was granted, largely through the agency
of one man. As a Wentworth had aided in subverting the liberties of
Englishmen, a second Wentworth redeemed the honor of his name by proving
the Shaftesbury of a second revolution, and procuring freedom for their
Australian descendants. Subsequent developments repeat the English
reforms of 1832, 1867, and 1881. Thus the colony described in less than
a century the evolution which it had taken the mother country fourteen
hundred years to accomplish. Younger colonies, omitting the earlier
stages, ran the same distance in far shorter periods.

They are not only repeating, they are anticipating, the history of the
parent state. Female suffrage has been conceded in two Australasian
colonies, and it is inevitable in the rest. The domination of a
socialist democracy is far advanced in the two former. The referendum,
or direct appeal to the people on specific issues, is on the eve of
general enactment. Ministries elected by the legislature are possibly
in the near future. Thus legislative bodies which sprang from the
crown are more democratic than those that sprang from the people.
Withal, the former retain an anomalous vestige of their origin. While
the business of legislation in Congress is necessarily conducted by
members who have no official connection with the executive, as it
was originally in the English Parliament, the British and colonial
ministries claim an ever-increasing monopoly of legislation on all
questions of any magnitude. It has long been recognized as impossible
for a private member to carry through the House of Commons a measure
of any consequence, and a colonial ministry arrests the progress of
a successful bill by intimating that the subject of it can only be
legislated upon by the Government.

The free involution of a legislature from below is naturally more rapid
than its reluctant devolution from above. The swift development of the
Massachusetts Company into the Massachusetts Legislature has been ably
traced by Professor Fiske, who is a sociologist as well as a historian.
The attempt to transact public business at a primary meeting of all the
freemen in the colony, assembling four times a year, repeats the old
Witenagemot, and failed for the same reason as that died out--because,
from the expansion of the population, the assemblage was impracticable.
It needed only four years for the freemen to acquire the right of
sending deputies to the General Court, and only fifteen to bring about a
permanent division into two Houses. Other early colonies passed through
the same stages; colonies of later foundation took up the development
at the bicameral stage. It is the history of a land and colonization
company of those days, or of a railway company in ours. The directors
become a Senate and the body of shareholders the popular House; the
statutes of the company are its constitution and the by-laws its
legislation. The origin of charter legislatures in a company explains a
parallel anomaly to that in crown legislatures. While the representative
Houses in British colonial legislatures have followed the House of
Commons in gathering all power into their own hands, in states descended
from the charter companies the House of Representatives has been losing,
while the Senate has gained authority. In both cases the apparent
anomaly is the outcrop of a deeper law. The ministry in the one case
and the senate in the other are each the embodiment of that continuous
social germ-plasm to which the popular will of the hour stands in
the same relation as the individual life does to the physiological
germ-plasm; and, as the latter is the true substance of the body, the
social germ-plasm is the substance of society, incarnating its permanent
interests, and therefore justly overriding the cries, the whims, the
passions of the hour.

The same dichotomy is visible in the colonial _judicature_. The
_paterfamilias_, the village elder, the tribal chief, the king, possess
and personally exercise an undelegated jurisdiction. Fully twenty years
ago a sociological worker surprised a historian of some pretensions,
who was conversant with the mere events of his special period, by
informing him that the practice of English kings to preside in their
own courts of justice came as far down as that very period--the reign
of James I. This prerogative was transmitted with the other attributes
of royalty to the governors of crown colonies, who "generally acted as
judges, sitting in the highest court." A New Jersey Cincinnatus revived
primitive simplicities by hearing causes seated on a tree stump in his
fields. The successive delegations of this power repeat the necessary
concessions that created the English judiciary. Side by side with the
royal prerogative grew up a popular jurisdiction which developed into
the jury; and it would be worth while to compare the acquisition of
this constitutional right (for example, in Connecticut and New South
Wales) with its history in England. Out of this element, and also as a
corollary from the election of a governor who was chief judge, came the
practice of electing judges in the North American colonies. It was by no
means confined to the charter colonies. Nowhere was the determination
toward an elective judiciary more noticeable than in Pennsylvania,
whose proprietary was its feudal sovereign. It may be historically
explained from the corrupt and servile judicature of the age when these
colonies were founded. The attachment to the old system in contemporary
British colonies may also be explained from the very different point
in the history of the mother country when they were given off, when
the talent, the purity, and independence of the bench had become the
pride of Englishmen, and the judges were Baconian in everything but
the taking of bribes. The English and (naturally in a far less degree)
the colonial courts still show traces of their royal origin in the
antiquated wig and gown, the arrogance of the judges, their haughty
point of honor--"contempt of court," and their aristocratic bias. These
are counterbalanced by the increasing strength of the popular element. A
hopeful bill was a few years ago introduced into a colonial legislature
restraining judges from commenting on evidence. A mere act of Parliament
would have as much effect on lawyers' loquacity as Mrs. Partington's
mop had on the Atlantic. It is, nevertheless, in the direction of
restricting the powers of the judges that the more radical colonies
are moving. In one southern community certain causes may be tried by
a judge with a jury of four, who will probably rise into assessors,
and in another that important step is possibly on the point of being
taken. The courageous Premier of South Australia, who lately defied the
entire English medical profession, has now taken in hand his own not
less formidable guild. He proposes that "in proceedings under certain
acts the bench is to consist of a judge of the Supreme Court with two
lay assessors, one appointed by each party to the suit"; and counselors
are peremptorily excluded from such proceedings. In certain other cases
litigants may submit statements of their differences to judges who will
adjudicate without the intervention of counsel. Thus the same middle
point may be reached from opposite termini. A series of levelings down
may bring judicatures of royal origin to the same stage as popular
jurisdictions have reached by a gradual leveling up. The courts will
then unite the majesty of the law, whose "voice is the harmony of the
world," with an impartiality and inexpensiveness that will insure to
every citizen the enjoyment of the most elementary of all rights--the
right to justice.

Side by side with the process of differentiation within colonies rose
up an integration of colonies with one another, which also repeats the
history of the mother country. The same principles of authority and
consent, again in unequal proportions, are blended here. It was by
conquest that the seven old English kingdoms were welded into a united
England, Strathclyde incorporated, Ireland annexed. By force disguised
as bribery, aided by the patriotic or interested efforts of a few
nobles and placemen and in opposition to the will of the inhabitants,
Scotland and Ireland were joined to England. Some four or five groups
of British colonies have reduplicated, or are now reduplicating, a
parallel development. In North America it was preceded and accompanied
by altercations among the different colonies. Boundary disputes
repeat old English intertribal struggles. Tariff wars are now waged,
and commercial reciprocity treaties contracted, between contemporary
colonies. New Haven and Connecticut, which consisted of towns federated
by consent, were united by force. Voluntary alliances against the
Indians or to conquer Canada, or involuntary unions under despotic
rulers, associated larger or smaller North American groups from Maine
to Maryland. The loose confederation of 1781 was too voluntary to last.
The final federation that superseded it had a large element of latent
force mixed with consent. It was hardly less a conquest of the North by
the South than that of the Heptarchy by Wessex. The Constitution is a
monument of Southern ascendency. So it was that, for seventy years off
and on, the United States was governed by a Southern oligarchy, whether
under the hegemony of Virginia or of South Carolina. The dominion of
Canada means (even under a French premier) the dominion of Ontario, with
Quebec bribed, and Newfoundland not bribed enough, to enter. In 1876 the
ten New Zealand provinces were amalgamated under a central Government
which for many years remained that of the earlier-settled North Island.
A federation of the Australian colonies planned seven years ago under
the auspices of protectionist Victoria, is likely to succeed under the
leadership of free-trading New South Wales. Mr. Rhodes is advising the
federation of the British colonies of South Africa; forty years ago a
federation of all the South African states was designed by Sir George
Grey, then high commissioner, but with little patriotism and still
less wisdom, for at that time it necessarily implied the dominance of
the Dutch element. In 1846 that far-seeing statesman had projected a
union of the South Sea Islands with New Zealand. Only four years ago
the same aged prophet of federation, with an eloquence inspired by
the theme, outlined to a Liberal audience a scheme for federating the
English-speaking peoples. These are dreams; but the dreams of to-day are
the realities of to-morrow, and every step taken toward the realization
of them is itself a gain.




ARCHITECTURAL FORMS IN NATURE.

BY F. S. DELLENBAUGH.

"Semblance of castle and arch and shrine
Towered aloft in the clear sunshine."


[Illustration: FIG. 1.--COMPLETED BRIDGE. NATURAL BRIDGE VIRGINIA]

The world is old, yet the world is new. It is old in our sight because
it has endured for a time that from our puny standpoint seems long, but
which, gauged by the standard of eternity, would barely be represented
by a single tick on the dial that knows no beginning and no end. It is
a work still in process; when it is done the human element will not be
here to admire or condemn it. When in the long ages of its development
parts of the solid crust have been pushed above the waters, the elements
have combined to pull them down and sink them again under the seas. It
is a battle between the waters and the dry land, and when during the
refreshing shower we see the rivulet at our feet brown with mud, we see
the victory of the rain; we see the price the earth is paying to this
subtle foe. This warfare goes on day by day, year by year, age by age,
and will go on as long as a dry rock rears its head above the deep. The
rains and frosts and winds, acting on the exposed surface with unceasing
energy, have in many localities produced strange contours and striking
resemblances to objects familiar in our daily life, especially to
buildings and other structures due to the hand of man. These are often
on a giant scale. But, in addition to the quality of size, these natural
forms possess as well the ever-important element of beauty, without
which bigness is vulgarity. Nature is never vulgar. Whether we look upon
the roadside violet that wilts under the touch, or whether we stand
wondering at Niagara, or strain to see the tiptop rock of the Grand
Cañon, we may always discern a radiant beauty, which pervades the world
to its foundations, and is poured out upon us unmeasured and unpriced.

[Illustration: FIG. 2.--COMPLETED ARCH.]

So these architectural forms that result from the perennial battle
between the dry land and the sea, no matter what their size, are
charming in majesty, in proportion, in harmony of color, and in variety
and grace of outline. Our imaginations are constantly in search of
resemblances, and it is not strange, therefore, that every land presents
to human curiosity numerous specimens, though it must be admitted that
the mind is sometimes taxed to discover the likeness. On the other
hand, some are so evident as to have acquired a world-wide celebrity.
The Natural Bridge of Virginia (Fig. 1) is not only a resemblance, it
is a reality. In the Rocky Mountain region are numerous other bridges
formed thus naturally. In the Cañon of Desolation, Green River, Utah,
far above the water are many natural arches in the thinner salients of
the monster cliffs. These perforations are often two thousand feet above
the river, looking like enormous windows opening on some other world.
In one a pine tree that must have been at least a hundred feet high was
growing, and its top was many feet below the crown of the arch. Wherever
this particular formation is exposed, these arches or bridges occur
in all stages of development. The sandstone of this formation has the
peculiarity of fracturing conchoidally, and when the face of a cliff
contains one of these fractures (due to weathering) and is not thick,
some crevice is sure to open a path to the enemy, which is soon widened
to a highway for the frost and rain, and a cascade in shower-time pours
down, picking up sand as it goes to help in the attack. The weathering
becomes more rapid, the arch opens up, and in time a natural bridge
(Fig. 2) spans the air where once there was but solid stone. The process
continuing, the bridge will disappear, a vacancy will take its place,
and far off in the river bottom, or still farther in the sea, will rest
the disintegrated material that once made part of the continuous cliff.
Where the cliff is too thick to be perforated (Fig. 3), the arch breaks
back into a deep cavern whose roof falls and falls till the blue sky
takes its place. Thus has a natural bridge, like a flower, its birth,
its growth, perfection, and decay. Wind erosion also plays a part, but
the chief work is due to water.

[Illustration: FIG. 3.--MIDDLE STAGE OF A BRIDGE OR ARCH.]

Besides bridges there are numberless other forms. Who has not seen
Castle or Pulpit Rocks, or Devil's Slides, or Palisades, etc.? But it is
in the West, perhaps, that the most remarkable rain carvings and wind
carvings occur, and especially in that part called the Southwest, that
"land as old as time is old," that strange, weird land of red rocks, of
tall, long cliff lines like mountain ranges split asunder to span the
desert in their nakedness; that land of labyrinthine cañons, where the
bloom of morning lingers to kiss the gloom of night; land of isolated
buttes that frown in lofty silence on the lower world like monuments
belonging to some cemetery of giants; land of _mesas_, plateaus,
pinnacles, and peaks.

[Illustration: FIG. 4.--"GARDEN OF THE GODS."]

The massive red-and-yellow buttes at Green River, Wyoming, are familiar
to passengers on the Union Pacific Railway, and have been beautifully
rendered on canvas by Thomas Moran. Visitors to Colorado Springs will
not forget the superb "Steeple" and "Cathedral" rocks in the Garden
of the Gods (Fig. 4), whose gorgeous vermilion is thrust vertically
into the Colorado blue; and many there are who have seen the wonders
of the Yellowstone and the Yosemite. In all these places there are
architectural forms that have justly received the admiring tribute of
thousands, yet in more remote regions are forms quite as remarkable that
have seldom been seen by the eyes of white men.

While riding northward across the Navajo Indian Reservation from Fort
Defiance, I well remember seeing, at a distance of a mile or so,
which may have "lent enchantment to the view," an immense arch in
red sandstone, and, more interesting still, one of the most perfect
suggestions of a building I have ever seen. To go closer at the time
was not practicable, nor even to stop for a more deliberate study, but
they were in sight from the slow-moving cavalcade for a considerable
time, and I have always remembered them as about the most perfect
architectural forms I have seen in all the West.

Pinnacles and multitudinous other forms were also there, and a close
inspection would doubtless have discovered many quite as near perfection
as those which attracted us from afar.

In other places in this same locality huge volcanic masses had been
pushed mysteriously, in remote geological time, here and there through
the strata of sandstones, and the layers of water-made rocks having
been subsequently cut away by the rains, the harder fire-made rocks
offering more resistance were left behind in tall spires, towers, and
various fantastic shapes. To one of them, revealing from the mountains
above it a central mass with winglike dikes spreading out on each side,
the Navajos have applied the name of _Tsebetai_, "The Stone Bird," and
by this name it is now known to all who enter the barren and peculiar
country. Gazing down upon it one day from the crest of the Tunicha
Plateau, I was instantly impressed by the felicity of the Indian title,
for there it lay upon the plain exactly like a great buzzard petrified
with wings outstretched for flight.

As a rule, it is not the volcanic rocks that furnish the close images
of bird, beast, or building. The sedimentary or water-made rocks yield
the greatest number and the closest resemblances. Even in towers
and pinnacles the water-made rocks, though softer, come out ahead,
frequently sending up their splendid shafts to hundreds of feet, or to a
full thousand, like the "Captains" in De Chelly Cañon, Arizona (Fig. 5).
Minarets and spires from one hundred to three or four hundred feet high
might be counted by thousands in the cliff and cañon country.

[Illustration: FIG. 5.--THE CAPTAINS.]

In far-away Greenland Dr. Kane came upon the red sandstone, "dreamy
semblance of a castle flanked with triple towers, completely isolated
and defined," which he named the "Three Brothers Turrets" (Fig. 6). Not
far from this he found a still more singular and impressive shaft, whose
poetical symmetry caused him to name it "Tennyson's Monument" (Fig. 7).
This he describes thus: "A single cliff of greenstone, marked by the
slaty limestone that once incased it, rears itself from a crumbled base
of sandstones, like the boldly chiseled rampart of an ancient city. At
its northern extremity, on the brink of a deep ravine which has worn its
way among the ruins, there stands a solitary column or minaret tower, as
sharply finished as if it had been cast for the Place Vendôme. Yet the
length of the shaft alone is four hundred and eighty feet, and it rises
on a plinth or pedestal itself two hundred and eighty."

In some of the cañons of the Great Walled River, the Colorado of the
West, turrets, pinnacles, and even natural arches stud the walls
with countless imitations of architectural forms, every bend of the
stream offering some fresh novelty. In parts of Marble Cañon the high
walls are eroded into endless alcoves, caves, towers, weather-beaten
castles, and a thousand and one weird or fantastic forms. One night,
just below our camp, was a perfect semblance of a ruined castle. Around
the indentations which answered for crumbling windows clung carelessly
bunches of mosses and ferns, while at one side from a mass of emerald
verdure, rendered greener and sweeter by contrast with the miles on
miles of barren red cliff up and down, gushed forth a clear spring whose
waters, churned to silver, dashed through the vines into the deep river
a hundred feet below.

[Illustration: FIG. 6.--THREE BROTHERS TURRETS.]

In the Cañon of Desolation, twenty-four hundred feet above the surface
of the river, surrounded by pine trees, is a formation that seemed
from below so exact a counterpart of a pioneer log cabin that it was
difficult to believe it was only a deception. The beetling wall which
it surmounted was named "Log Cabin Cliff."

Another class of resemblances are those called "domes." The Domes of
the Yosemite are a well-known example, but the Five Domes of the Virgin
River in southern Utah are perhaps quite as wonderful, while having the
advantage of more inviting color. The region surrounding them is one
of the most remarkable scenic spots on the continent, and in time will
become as celebrated as the Yosemite or the Yellowstone. It has fewer
freaks and curiosities, perhaps, but probably more real beauty. Not far
from the Five Domes are the Temples of the Virgin (Fig. 8), similar to
the domes, but more rugged at the top. These are veritable temples of
the gods, solid as the rock-ribbed earth itself.

There are also in some places domes hollowed out. In Glen Cañon of the
Colorado, a little below the mouth of the San Juan, is a dome of this
character carved out of the homogeneous sandstone by the action of a
pretty brook, which in fair weather is a mere rivulet, but in rain
time is an angry flood, sweeping down on its tide immense quantities
of sand. This little stream enters at the back of the cavern through a
very deep, narrow cleft, not more than a foot or two wide, and after a
plunge of some thirty feet or more into a clear pool trickles on out
to the river, which flows past the entrance. The chamber is about two
hundred feet high, with a narrow crevice twisting on up to the top of
the cliffs, about a thousand feet, while the area of the sandy floor is
about two hundred by five hundred. Its mouth is barred by a little grove
of box-elder trees. When the storm is abroad the innocent brook grows
to a giant in an hour, because of the rain accumulating on the barren,
rock-surfaced country as on the roof of a house, and, gathering the
load of sand in its impetuous clutch, it hurls it against the bounding
walls, thus doing its part in the war of the waters against the land.
I have counted dozens of these cascades leaping over the cañon walls
during heavy rainstorms. An exploring party once camped within the dome
mentioned, and, thinking it rendered well their songs, they named it
"Music Temple." Some carved their names on the soft sandstone wall, and
three of these a short time after were sent by the Indians to the Great
Dome of all.

[Illustration: FIG. 7.--TENNYSON'S MONUMENT.]

The extensive Pink Cliffs, forming the escarpment of the southern edge
of the Great Basin, are of the colonnade type, and for many miles their
exquisite color and massive columnar façades crown the high country ten
thousand feet or more above the sea, visible far to southward, and with
the underlying Gray Cliffs and the still lower down Vermilion Cliffs
(which find their beginning in Glen Cañon of the Colorado, and trace
their serpentine line leagues to the west to meet the Temples of the
Virgin) form one of the most magnificent panoramas to be found anywhere
in the world. Detached and isolated portions of these Pink Cliffs,
surrounded by the upper members of the Gray, produce sometimes novel
effects. I recall one sunny morning when I found myself suddenly in a
silent grassy glade, green and gray all round, with before me what can
be likened only to an immense pipe organ, its delicate pink columnar
pipes standing full two hundred feet high against a somber background of
pines where Æolus could be heard sighing for the lost chord.

[Illustration: FIG. 8.--TEMPLES OF THE VIRGIN.]

Major Dutton, in his Geology of the High Plateaus of Utah, says of these
Pink Cliffs: "The resemblances to strict architectural forms are often
startling. The upper tier of the vast amphitheater is one mighty ruined
colonnade. Standing obelisks, prostrate columns, shattered capitals,
panels, niches, buttresses, repetitions of symmetrical forms, all
bring vividly before the mind suggestions of the work of giant hands,
a race of genii once rearing temples of rock, but now chained up in
a spell of enchantment, while their structures are falling in ruins
through centuries of decay. Along the southern and southeastern flank
of the Paunsagant (plateau) these ruins stretch mile after mile. But
the crowning work is Table Cliff in the background. Standing eleven
thousand feet above sea level and projected against the deep blue of the
western sky, it presents the aspect of a vast Acropolis crowned with a
Parthenon. It is hard to dispel the fancy that this is a work of some
intelligence and design akin to that of humanity, but far grander. Such
glorious tints, such keen contrasts of light and shade, such profusion
of sculptured forms, can never be forgotten by him who has once beheld
it."

Thus everywhere the imagination is roused to the comparison of the
natural and the artificial; with little effort it discovers classic
outlines in these rain-carved forms. And occasionally there is
something uncanny about them. In eastern Utah, some miles from the
point where White River joins the Green, and close by the former stream,
lies a whole group of natural edifices, to which General Hughes applied
the name of Goblin City. Remote and lonely at the time of our visit, in
the midst of a hostile country, the numerous small houselike buttes,
resting like a real town in the bottom of the rugged, desolate gorge,
seemed about to pour out an angry host, to stop our further entrance
into their weird and forbidding land. The broken cliffs through which
we had descended to the "City" presented detached rocks here and there
looking like petrified guardsmen who might only be revived by the
Prince's kissing the Sleeping Beauty, somewhere perhaps to be found in
this goblin realm.

[Illustration: FIG. 9.--GUNNISON'S BUTTE; 2,700 feet above river.]

Gunnison's Butte, on Green River, not far from the point where the brave
captain crossed the stream in 1853, is a fine example of what may be
called the cathedral type (Fig. 9). Rising supreme in colossal dignity
twenty-seven hundred feet above the river bank, in its tender color, in
its splendid lines, it is without a rival. On its southwestern part,
toward the base, the numerous abutments and little slopes crowning
them are of a pure delicate blue, rivaling the tint of a summer sky.
Extending far to westward, these Azure Cliffs, which begin with
Gunnison's Butte, present one of the most remarkable and beautiful
touches of color the rocks have ever unfolded. Near the mouth of the
San Rafael, Dellenbaugh's Butte (Fig. 10) exhibits a different type,
likened by the explorers of the region to an art gallery, because of
its broad roof and simplicity of outline. Four hundred feet high, its
chocolate-brown mass rests beside Green River, silent, serene, as if
waiting for the jury to finish arranging the exhibit and open the doors
to the public.

[Illustration: FIG. 10.--THE ART GALLERY.]

Monument Rocks near Colorado Springs are well known for their fantastic
shapes, but another set of similar monuments in southern Colorado are
not so familiar, and have been formed in a different way. Those near
Colorado Springs are due to a hard spot in the rocks acting as a kind
of roof for the portions below, but in the other case the resistance
has been offered by fragments of basalt rolling down to a plain from a
neighboring hilltop, and assuming protection over the area upon which
they happened to rest. Thus they soon found themselves topping numerous
adopted monuments twenty or thirty feet high (Fig. 11).

[Illustration: FIG. 11.--BASALT TOPPING EARTH.]

One of the most out-of-the-way regions left within our boundaries
is that lying around the junction of the Grand and Green Rivers in
eastern Utah. These two rivers, flowing at this point in cañons about
twelve hundred feet deep, come together in a cañon thirteen hundred
feet deep to form the Colorado. You climb out from the junction by
a narrow crevice, and on top find yourself on a barren, much-cut-up
plateau. The surface is verdureless, consisting for the most part of
bare rock split by numerous crevices. You are in the midst of "The
Land of Standing Rock," as the Indians call it. Powell, in referring
to this locality, says: "We must not conceive of piles of bowlders or
heaps of fragments, but a whole land of naked rock, with giant forms
carved on it; cathedral-shaped buttes towering hundreds or thousands of
feet; cliffs that can not be scaled, and cañon walls that shrink the
river into insignificance; with vast hollow domes, and tall pinnacles
and shafts set on the verge overhead." Near and far in all directions
the eye encounters pinnacle after pinnacle, butte after butte, cliff
after cliff, like a stone forest, impassable, impenetrable, except to
the trained mountaineer. Some of the shapes here are most peculiar.
One which I call the Synagogue (Fig. 12), as no other name, so far as I
know, has ever been applied, is representative. Its lines are strikingly
like those of the temple of Khandaria in Khwahrao, Central India. It
has a round main structure, showing several deep lines of horizontal
molding, and is of a deep reddish-brown color. The "roof" is a light
pinkish red, as I remember it, and rounds up to a central cupola of the
lower color. Springing from the front is a beautiful minaret, carrying
the darker color to the apex.

[Illustration: FIG. 12.--THE SYNAGOGUE.]

Though strange rock structures abound in all this region, it is in the
specially arid portions that they are most common. The strata being
unprotected by vegetation, the wearing away is more rapid, and follows
more eccentric lines. The higher and drier a locality, there--provided
there is some rainfall--will be found the most extraordinary rain
carvings. The lack of abundant rain prevents the growth of vegetation
and the altitude permits the rain torrents to carry loads of sand, and
the more sand and velocity the greater the scouring. In some of these
intermittent stream courses the sand and bowlders scoop out deep holes
like huge pots--a variety, in fact, of the hole known in geology as
"pothole" (Fig. 13). These are very deep and sometimes provide a thirsty
traveler with a draught of clear water that has lingered from the last
shower. In some places these "pockets" or "tanks" supply the only
water to be had, and it is a glad sight when one sees a pocket before
him. Each formation has its own peculiarities of erosion, or as Dutton
aptly puts it, "its own school of natural architecture." Given, then, a
particular formation exposed to the atmosphere, it can be foretold just
what its natural architectural forms will be, whether domes, minarets,
pinnacles, arches, towers, or what.

Architectural forms are not confined to the United States, nor to the
American continent. The Giant's Causeway in Ireland is a familiar
example of what they have in those parts, while under the Arabian sky
the conditions resemble those in our arid Southwest, and there we find
many fantastic rain carvings. Among these is the Sphinx of El Guerrah,
carved by the rain-sculptor doubtless expressly to furnish answers to
our "whys and wherefores" concerning this "wondrous architecture of the
world."

[Illustration: FIG. 13.--POTHOLES IN INTERMITTENT STREAM COURSE.]

       *       *       *       *       *

     Among the applications proposed for the newly liquefied gases
     is their use as aids in balloon navigation. An aëronaut having a
     few bottles of liquefied hydrogen or illuminating gas has the means
     of increasing the inflation of his balloon when necessary, and
     need not fear to waste a little gas when he wishes to diminish its
     levity. Prof. L. Errera, of Brussels, has suggested an apparatus
     which he calls the _ceinture de natation_, or natation belt, by
     which these objects can be conveniently accomplished.




THE HERDS OF THE YELLOW ANT.

BY JAMES WEIR, JR., M. D.


As far as my observations go, and they extend through a period of twenty
years, the aphides which live on grapevines, and which are the peculiar
cows of the common yellow ant (_Lasius flavus_) of our gardens, show
many curious phases in their life history. Especially is this true of
the manner in which they perpetuate their species.

If a colony of aphides be kept under observation during the summer,
it will be noticed that several kinds of individuals arise within it.
By far the largest number of the herd will be made up of the wingless
agamic form--that is, of females which reproduce without mating. In the
species under consideration the young (_during the summer_) are born
alive, and do not come from eggs.

So rapid is the increase of these insects that overproduction would
soon kill off the colony by starvation were it not held in check by the
peculiar anatomical and physiological metamorphoses which make their
appearance in the offspring from time to time. Every now and then young
ones are born which, in the course of time, evolve two pairs of wings;
these winged individuals (which are also females and agamic) abandon
the colony and produce elsewhere, in turn, wingless and _single-winged_
individuals. In autumn both males and females are born; these mate and
the females lay eggs.

These creatures secrete a honeylike fluid which exudes from two tubelike
teats on the back of the sixth abdominal segment. Ants are passionately
fond of this honey-milk and jealously guard and protect the herds of
aphidian cows which produce it. They can be seen at all hours of the
day, busily engaged in milking their queer kine. They will gently stroke
the aphides with their antennæ, thus inducing a free flow of the nectar
from the abdominal tubules. Calves effect a like result by nudging their
mothers with their heads; the cows "give down" their milk when thus
assaulted by the calves.

In autumn, as soon as ovipositing has begun, the ants gather the aphis
eggs as fast as they are laid and carry them into their nests. Here they
remain, carefully guarded and protected by the ants, until they hatch
out in the spring, when the young agamic females are carried out by
their foster mothers and placed upon the tender grape shoots or buds.
This year the ants brought out the young aphides, which formed the herds
kept under observation this summer, on the 18th of March. On the 19th
they carried them back into the nest; this occurred in the forenoon,
when the sun was shining and the air was warm and balmy. About 12 M.
it began to storm, and became quite cold; that night there was a hard
frost. The ants evidently knew that this change in the weather was about
to occur; therefore they removed their property to a warm and sheltered
place. I have often watched the ants in autumn when the aphides were
ovipositing; the former would caress the latter, and seemingly would
endeavor to stimulate and cheer them during the operation. As soon,
however, as the eggs were deposited, the ants would seize and carry
them into the nest; the aphis mother was left, without any compunctions
whatever, to die during the first frost! Her life work had ended, and
the economy of Nature needed her no longer.

[Illustration: ICHNEUMON FLY LAYING EGGS ON APHIDES.]

Ants are always on the lookout for the new colonies which are
continually being started by the winged females. As soon as one of these
new herds is found by an ant, she returns to the nest and notifies
her companions. One or two ants then accompany her to her newly found
treasure, which in future is always, night and day, under their watchful
care. As the herd increases in numbers, additional herdsmen, or rather
dairymaids, are called into service.

Associated with this species are commonly to be found other species of
aphides, notably the one which secretes, or rather excretes, a white
powdery substance which is to be seen on their backs in soft, plumose
masses. On microscopic examination this substance is found to be fairly
teeming with microbia. These microbes, at the first glance, seem to be
of different species; maturer judgment, however, declares them to be but
metamorphic forms of the same individual.

A "white" aphis can be seen in the photograph at the base of the upper
leaf stem. With a small pocket lens the details of this creature's
structure can be easily made out. There are several of these aphides
on the vine, but the one mentioned is the largest and the most
conspicuous. They are much larger than the nectar-producers, are oval
in shape, and distinctly flattened. In fact, in general outline they
are strikingly like that _bête noire_ of all good housekeepers--the
_Cimex lectularius_. The ants frequently congregate about these little
creatures and appear to be paying them some kind of court. When I cut
the vine for photographic purposes, six or eight ants were standing
about the large individual mentioned above; they soon became aware
that some dire calamity had happened, or was about to happen, either
to their beloved herd or to themselves, and, becoming frightened, soon
abandoned cattle and pasture and fled away in panic terror. I had hoped
to photograph them _in situ_, but found this to be impossible with the
instruments at my disposal.

The ants do not "milk" these white aphides, neither do they eat the
excrementitious substance on their backs. The white individuals,
however, seem to be factors in the social economy of the herd, for the
ants move them, on occasions, along with the herd to other pastures.
Once I saw an ant pick up a white aphis and carry it to a leaf some
little distance away from the colony; she then returned, picked up a
gravid nectar-producing aphis, and carried her to the spot where she had
left the white individual. In a few days a fine herd of "milkers" was
to be seen grazing in the new field. I judge from this that these white
aphides are in some way useful to, if not absolutely necessary for, the
welfare of the herd.

The winged females have both compound eyes and _ocelli_, or primitive
eyes, yet they seek the under surface of the leaf, thus seeming to
prefer the more subdued light to be found there. The young are always
deposited on the under surface of the leaves; in a few days, however,
they either migrate of their own accord to the more succulent stems or
are carried thither by the ants, which never cease to watch over and
care for them.

[Illustration: AN APHIS-LION.]

In order to test this guardianship, I have frequently wounded the vine
below a colony of aphides, thus cutting off, to a certain extent, the
flow of sap. The ants would soon discover this and would at once begin
to move the herd to another vine. The aphis is provided with boring and
suction organs somewhat similar to those of the mosquito. In point of
fact, it is interesting to note that the ancestors of the mosquito, in
all probability, lived wholly on the juices of plants; hence, in this
respect, the resemblance is more real than apparent. Aphides, also, like
mosquitoes, have the curious habit of elevating their bodies, "standing
on their heads," after they have become gorged with food; this can be
observed in the drawings.

[Illustration: COCOON, LARVA, EGGS, AND ADULT OF APHIS-LION
(_Chrysopha_). Slightly modified from Comstock.]

The cow of the yellow ant should not be confounded with her harmful
cousin, _Phylloxera vastatrix_, the deadliest enemy of the grape.
Fortunately for us, this last-mentioned aphis does not abound in
the United States; in France and other European countries, however,
phylloxera has occasioned the loss of millions of dollars.

Notwithstanding the fact that the ants are exceedingly zealous in
guarding their property, many of the aphides fall victims to the
assaults of their enemies. The most cunning, insidious, and crafty
of their foes are the ichneumon flies, three varieties of which are
continually, during the summer months and in autumn, endeavoring to
cradle their young in the bodies of the aphides.

One of these flies, which can be seen in the drawing, is quite large;
I am inclined to believe, therefore, that their larvæ do not pupate in
the bodies of their hosts, but undergo further metamorphoses elsewhere.
Another of these flies is very small, hardly larger, in fact, than the
insect which it selects as a living cradle for its young. The ichneumon
shows rare intelligence, inasmuch as she invariably deposits her eggs
on the young members--the calves, as it were--of the herd; she seems to
know that the older aphides would die before the ichneumon grubs arrived
at a suitable age for pupation; hence she selects the young ones. She
runs here and there about the colony until she finds a young aphis;
then, curving her abdomen between her legs, she will quickly lay an egg
on the body of the unconscious insect. When the egg hatches the larva
feeds on the body of its host (carefully avoiding the vital organs,
however) until the time arrives for it to undergo further metamorphoses.
The animated cradle and cupboard eventually dies, but not until its
queer baby has arrived at an age at which it has no further use for it.

The ants are fully aware of the fact that the ichneumon is a deadly
enemy of their cows; hence, when one of these flies is seen hovering
over the herd, they at once become alert and endeavor to chase her away
whenever she alights. She manages, however, to elude them every now and
then, and to lodge her fatal eggs on some of the tender young aphides.

Another implacable foe of these creatures is the larva of a neuropterous
insect which in its perfect or mature form resembles the dragon fly. It
is technically known as an aphis-lion, and differs very widely in habits
from the common and well-known ant-lions. The last-mentioned grubs dig
pits, at the bottoms of which they lie in wait for and seize their
prey whenever it falls therein; the aphidian lion is, on the contrary,
a bold and skillful hunter, and takes its prey wherever it may find
it. It is an ugly, heavy, slothful-looking grub, yet it is remarkably
agile. When darting upon its quarry (and it hunts the winged aphides
only), its thick, clumsy-looking legs move with such rapidity that they
can scarcely be seen. Its movements as well as its shape are decidedly
lacertilian; in fact, when it is seen coursing over the grape leaves in
pursuit of its prey, it reminds one irresistibly of the brilliant little
lizards which are to be observed running here and there over stone
walls, fences, and sunny woodland paths. This creature stalks its prey
like the lycosids or hunting spiders, and fairly bounds upon it when it
arrives within grasping distance. Its catlike movements when creeping up
on its quarry are wonderful to behold, and indicate a very high degree
of intelligence.

[Illustration: A COLONY OF APHIDES.]

In color it is jet black; in fact, in certain lights it glistens like a
jet jewel. It is about half an inch long and one sixteenth of an inch
broad. On the margins of its body, from its head to its tail, are rows
of thorn-like spines. Its masticatory organs, as well as its viscera,
are much more highly developed than are those of ant-lions. It is a
brave little creature, and only succumbs to the ants (which make war
on it wherever they find it, thus showing that they are fully aware of
the fact that it is inimical to their herds) when life ceases. During
the last twenty years I have frequently observed this larva, and have
endeavored to follow it in its metamorphoses. I have succeeded only
once, however, in carrying it through to its _imago_ or perfect form.
It is not described in any of my lists, and may be, therefore, a new
species. There is another aphis-lion which in very many respects closely
resembles the one just described. It is pictured by Professor Comstock,
a modification of whose drawing is here produced. He writes of this
creature as follows:

"When the aphis-lion is full grown, it rolls itself up into a tiny ball
and weaves around itself a glistening, white cocoon, which looks like a
seed pearl." (This can be seen in the sketch near the base of the upper
leaf.) "It may be supposed that while the aphis-lion is secluded in
this pearly cell it repents its greedy, murderous ways, and changes in
spirit; at least the body changes greatly, for, after a time, a circular
lid is made in the cocoon, and out of it there emerges a beautiful,
dainty creature, with delicate-veined, green wings, a pale-green body,
slender brown antennæ, and a pair of large eyes that shine like melted
gold. It is sometimes called golden-eyes, and sometimes a laced-wing
fly, from its appearance."

This beautiful little insect evinces marvelous forethought in the matter
of perpetuating her kind. She knows that her young are predaceous,
devouring anything in the shape of an insect or an egg that they can
secure; she is aware of the fact that, if she were to deposit her eggs,
side by side, on a leaf, the first young aphis-lion hatched out would
devour all of the remaining eggs. In order to guard against this, she
spins a delicate but stiff stalk of hard silk, upon the tip of which
she deposits an egg. By the side of this stalk she rears another, and
another, and another, tipping each with an egg, until finally, when she
has finished ovipositing, there appears a miniature grove of delicate
silken stems, each one of which bears aloft on its summit a round and
shining egg. When the first-born of this brood makes its appearance, it
crawls down the stem to the surface of the leaf, and goes in search of
food, utterly unconscious of the rich and toothsome feast just above its
head on the tips of the other stalks!

Lubbock concludes, from certain experiments, that the yellow ant
will not voluntarily drop from an elevation. Now, observations and
experiments made by myself teach me that these ants (_Lasius flavus_)
_will_ drop from elevations when they wish to attain a certain object.

On one occasion one of the herds of aphides under observation was
discovered by a wandering black ant (_Lasius niger_), which reported
her discovery to her comrades. At once a marauding expedition was
inaugurated by these cattle thieves, which fiercely attacked the yellow
guardians of the herd. The black rievers swarmed up the grapevine, but
were met by the brave yellow warriors, which valiantly withstood their
attack. Finally, the yellow ants were in danger of being overwhelmed by
numbers, when I suddenly perceived that they were being re-enforced.
Closer examination revealed the fact that they were crawling up a
neighboring vine and then dropping from an overhanging leaf on to the
leaf on the stem of which the aphides were feeding. They could not reach
the herd by way of the original path on account of the intervening
army of black ants, hence their shrewd and most intelligent use of
the neighboring vine and overhanging leaf. I am glad to report that
the yellow ants were victorious, and that they completely routed the
would-be robbers.

When alarmed, the yellow ant will draw in its legs and drop to the
ground; moreover, this is characteristic of all vine- and tree-climbing
ants, Lubbock to the contrary notwithstanding. It stands to reason that
past experiences must have taught them that they received no injury from
involuntary tumbles; that they have evolved the habit of voluntarily
throwing themselves from an elevation in order to attain certain objects
does not seem to me, therefore, at all wonderful or extraordinary.




TWO GIFTS TO FRENCH SCIENCE.

BY M. HENRI DE PARVILLE.


M. Antoine Thomson d'Abbadie, of the Academy of Sciences and Bureau
of Longitudes, France, who died in Paris, March 20, 1897, was born in
Dublin, January 3, 1810, of a family of the Basses-Pyrénées temporarily
residing in Ireland, but which returned to France in 1815. The
d'Abbadies are said to have been descended from the lay monks instituted
by Charlemagne to defend the frontier against the incursions of the
Saracens. The name d'Abbadie was not originally a proper name, but the
title of a function (_abbatia abbadia_), and designated those soldiers
who lived in the abbeys of the Basque country, lance in hand. Hence the
name, which is well diffused, whether spelled with two _b_s or one.

While still very young Antoine d'Abbadie manifested an unusual curiosity
concerning the unknown around him. "What is there at the end of the
road?" he asked his nurse. "A river," she replied. "And what is beyond
the river?" "A mountain." "And what then?" "I don't know; I never was
there." "Well," said he, "I will go and see." He was the same as he grew
up, always wanting to know. He visited Brazil upon a mission for the
Academy of Sciences, and on his return joined his brother at Alexandria.

Unknown Ethiopia attracted his attention, and he engaged with his
brother Arnould in archæological researches. Archæology proved
unfruitful, and the two brothers took up geodesy. For eleven years
Antoine d'Abbadie traveled though Ethiopia, living the life of the
natives, and making himself master of the five Abyssinian dialects.
The exploration was difficult and sown with dangers. Antoine d'Abbadie
covered the country from Massouah, on the shore of the Red Sea, to the
interior of the land of Kaffa, which he was the first to visit, with a
triangulation that involved the fixing of five thousand positions at
five hundred and twenty-five successive stations. The distance between
Massouah and Mount Wocho in southern Kaffa is about one thousand
kilometres, a little more than the crossing of France along the meridian
of Paris, and the trigonometric network reached two hundred and fifty
kilometres in breadth. Antoine d'Abbadie remained in Gallaland from
1837 to 1848. The labors of the two brothers, too numerous to cite
here, concerned also ethnography and linguistics. Both were nominated
Chevaliers of the Legion of Honor on the same day, September 27, 1850.
The doors of the Academy of Sciences were opened to Antoine d'Abbadie
August 27, 1867, and he was named a member of the Bureau des Longitudes
in 1878. He was in charge of the observation of the transit of Venus in
Santo Domingo in 1882.

[Illustration: FIG. 1.--CHÂTEAU D'ABBADIE. General view. (A gift to the
French Academy of Sciences.)]

Instead of devoting himself to a specialty, as is done now to excess,
d'Abbadie pursued the scientific movement in its various forms, and
was at once an astronomer, geodesian, archæologist, ethnographer,
numismatist, and interested in other fields. With his noble character he
made himself esteemed and loved during his whole working life by all so
fortunate as to make his acquaintance. In an interview I had with him a
few weeks before his death, when his disease had already gained a strong
hold upon him and he was nearly speechless, he expressed himself freely
concerning the future, although he uttered every word with difficulty,
and it was easy to see that it caused him pain. The topic was science,
and he wanted to talk about it.

When he was president of the Academy of Sciences, a few years ago, he
sacrificed himself to be equal to the honor that had been conferred upon
him. Speaking was already becoming very difficult to his tired vocal
organs. He made extreme efforts during the whole year to fulfill his
duty as president, and was punctual at the Monday sessions to the end.

In 1896, feeling the advance of age, he determined to make a splendid
present to the Academy of Sciences. The Duc d'Aumale had given Chantilly
to the Institute. M. Antoine d'Abbadie gave the Academy of Sciences his
magnificent Château d'Abbadie, near Hendaye, in the Basses-Pyrénées,
on the coast of the Bay of Biscay. The academy will enter upon the
possession of this property, of three hundred and ten hectares of land
surrounding it, and of a capital producing a revenue of forty thousand
francs (eight thousand dollars) after the death of Madame d'Abbadie.
Only a single condition is imposed on the gift. Having carried on his
astronomical work at Abbadia and begun there to catalogue the stars
and study the variations of gravity, he asked in exchange for his
incomparable gift that the academy should complete in fifty years a
catalogue of five hundred thousand stars. The bureau of the academy
dispatched its president, M. Cornu, and its perpetual secretary, M.
Bertrand, to Abbadia as its representatives to express its gratitude
to M. and Madame d'Abbadie. The faith of the academy was pledged to
continue the work begun by M. d'Abbadie, and a commemorative medal was
given him bearing on one side a portrait of Arago, and on the other a
minute of the gift and the thanks of the company.

The Château of Abbadia will therefore be devoted to the determination
of the stars that are not yet catalogued. Probably, as was the donor's
thought, the religious orders or some of the secular priests will
perform this colossal labor. The chaplain of the château has already
given his service to the work. In any case, those who may live in the
château will have no cause to complain of their home. Abbadia is a very
interesting structure, built from plans by Viollet-le-Duc, modified and
carried out by the architect Duthoit, with suggestions of the fourteenth
and sixteenth centuries. The observatory adjoins the château, which
it antedates thirty years in building, and has a meridian telescope
and the essential astronomical instruments. In the deep cellar of
the observatory M. d'Abbadie made more than two thousand seismic
observations with the pendulum.

The château stands in an admirable situation, and presents a very fine
external aspect. We give a general view of it and a picture of the main
entrance. The interior decoration is very beautiful.

[Illustration: FIG. 2.--PRINCIPAL ENTRANCE TO THE CHÂTEAU D'ABBADIE.]

Those who have had the privilege of visiting Abbadia have remarked that
a stone is missing from the balcony of one of the windows; this stone,
according to the wishes of the donor, is never to be put in place. A
history is connected with its absence. M. d'Abbadie, in the course of
a journey in America, contracted a strong friendship with Prince Louis
Napoleon, who was then in the United States. The prince once said to
him, "If I ever come into power, whatever you may ask of me is granted
in advance." The prince became Emperor of the French. Napoleon III had
a good memory. He met his former companion one day, and said to him in
an offhand way: "I promised when we were in America to give you whatever
you would ask for; have you forgotten it?" M. d'Abbadie replied: "I have
built myself a château near Hendaye, where I hope to spend the rest of
my days. If you will be so kind as to go a few kilometres out of the way
for me during your coming visit to Biarritz, I shall consider myself
highly honored if you will lay the last stone of my house." Napoleon
smiled and promised. But that was in 1870, and Napoleon III never
returned to Biarritz. That is the reason a stone is missing at Abbadia.

An account is also appropriate here of that other gift to French science
and letters of the Château of Chantilly, made to the Institute of France
in 1886, by the late Duc d'Aumale, whose tragic death in consequence
of the terrible disaster at the Bazaar de Charité, Paris, occurred
near in time to that of M. d'Abbadie. The duke was conspicuous as a
soldier, as a man of letters, the author of the History of the Princes
of Condé, and as a great bibliophile; as a member of the French Academy
(1871), taking the place of Montalembert; of the Academy of Moral and
Political Sciences, and of the Academy of Fine Arts; and as a patriot,
though a banished prince. The gift was made three months after the
decree was issued banishing the Orleans princes from France, and after
the duke had expostulated with M. Grévy in vain against the step. The
deed reads: "Wishing to preserve to France the domain of Chantilly
in its integrity, with its woods, lawns, waters, buildings, and all
that they contain--trophies, pictures, books, objects of art, and the
whole of what forms, as it were, a complete and various monument of
French art in all its branches, and of the history of my country in its
epochs of glory--I have resolved to commit the trust to a body which
has done me the honor of calling me into its ranks by a double title,
and which, without being independent of the inevitable transformations
of societies, escapes the spirit of faction and all too abrupt
shocks, maintaining its independence through political fluctuations.
Consequently, I give to the Institute of France, which shall dispose of
it according to conditions to be hereafter determined, the domain of
Chantilly as it shall exist on the day of my death, with the library and
the other artistic and historical collections which I have formed in
it, the household furniture, statues, trophies of arms, etc." The sole
condition attached to the gift was that nothing should be changed at
Chantilly. The chapel, where the heart of Condé is deposited, should be
retained, devoted to worship, with special masses to be said at stated
times, and the splendid collections of the château should together be
called the Condé Museum. In 1889 the Government authorized the duke to
return to France. He refused to accept the permission as a matter of
favor, but only as one of right. He returned, however, and took his seat
in the academy in May of that year.--_Translated for the Popular Science
Monthly from articles in La Nature._

[Illustration: FIG. 3.--THE CHÂTEAU OF CHANTILLY. (Presented by the late
Duc d'Aumale to the Institute of France.)]




THE MONGOOSE IN JAMAICA.

BY C. W. WILLIS, MEMBER OF THE INSTITUTE OF JAMAICA.


About fifteen or twenty years ago the mongoose (_Herpestes griseus_) was
imported from India by the colonial government and introduced into the
island of Jamaica, in the West Indies, for the ostensible purpose of
destroying the large, gray, white-bellied rat which played havoc with
the growing cane on the sugar plantations.

The mongoose belongs to the _Viverridæ_, or civet-cat family, which is
closely allied to the _Felidæ_, one of the most widely diversified among
the carnivora. But the mongoose differs materially from the civet cats,
for it belongs properly to the subfamily _Herpestinæ_, or ichneumons,
having toes slender and straight, and separate from one another; the
scent glands, so highly developed in the civet cat, being either small
or entirely absent. Most of the ichneumons are natives of Africa, but
several are Indian, and one form (_H. ichneumon_) extends to southern
Spain.

_H. griseus_ is the true mongoose of India, and is the animal imported
into Jamaica. In its native habitat it devours snakes, rats, lizards,
and other creatures not in favor with humanity. Its color is gray,
darker on the head and legs; its feet are blackish, and the end of the
tail is tipped with black. Beneath the longer gray- or white-ringed
hairs there is a fine, short, reddish under fur. The body of the
full-grown animal is about twenty-one inches in length, and the tail
eighteen inches.

Like Pharaoh's rat in Egypt, to which it is allied, the mongoose is
highly valued in India, and is often kept tame about the houses for the
services that it renders in destroying snakes and other plagues. It is
especially famous for its prowess in destroying the deadly cobra, a feat
performed by force of its superior boldness and activity.

That the little animal has fairly achieved the object for which it
was imported can not be gainsaid, but that it would ever become the
universal pest which it is at the present day, and has been for several
years, was never anticipated. So long as it kept to the cane-growing
plantations, and ate the planter's poultry and all young and available
animal life, all went well; but with its rapid and prolific powers of
reproduction and its vagabond and roaming disposition, in a very short
time it was found to be in every part of the island, from the seashore
to the tops of the loftiest mountains, the highest peak of which is
seventy-three hundred feet above the sea level.

[Illustration: THE MONGOOSE (_Herpestes griseus_) IN JAMAICA.]

Though it has not exterminated the cane rats, it has lessened their
numbers, and saved the sugar planters a vast sum of money. But it has
nearly exterminated the ground laying and feeding birds. It devours
poultry and eggs of all kinds, on the ground and in trees, including
those of the land turtle, so that the latter, once very numerous and
highly esteemed as an article of food by the native epicures, is now
seldom found. Here may be mentioned an interesting fact, that the
mongoose, in no way a tree-climbing animal in its native India, has
become such in Jamaica, as its voracious appetite lessened the numbers
of ground feeding and laying birds, and compelled it to take to the
trees in order to enlarge its food supply.

The mongoose kills young pigs that roam, half wild, over the island;
also lambs and kids. It eats fruits of all kinds, fish, wild fowl,
snakes, lizards, and crabs; and the once plentiful edible lizards and
land crabs are now rarely seen. All young and tender life, both animal
and vegetable, is included in its daily _menu_. When the mongoose has
cleared off all the animal life, it turns its attention to the "ground
provisions," and here it shows the varieties of its tastes and the
strength of its jaws. It will grovel with its paws until yams, cocos,
sweet potatoes, cassava both bitter and sweet, and other ground food
tubers are laid bare.

Of fruit, the mongoose has a partiality for bananas, the mango, and
others, as well as for some of the tree vegetables, such as the
delicious akee (_Cupania edulis_), and the avocado, or alligator pear.
It will, likewise, when the irrigating canals are drained for cleansing,
seize fish and make off with them. Not the least harm it has done
has been the destruction of insectivorous birds and lizards, and the
consequent increase of another nuisance, the tick. This is a subject
which the Jamaica Government is bound to take up in the near future, and
there will be found only one remedy--the introduction, propagation, and
protection of insect-eating birds, for the question of adopting some
plan for the wholesale destruction of the mongoose has thus far proved
fruitless.

The mongoose breeds six times a year, and each time there are from
five to ten young ones. The animal lives in the hollows of trees, dry
walls, and other similar places. Its activity is wonderful, and it very
seldom misses its quarry, which, when secured, the mongoose proceeds
to mutilate in the groin, first of all drinking the warm blood, then
devouring the liver and heart.

In Jamaica there was a very beautiful indigenous snake (_Chilobothrus
inornatus_), a friend of the agriculturist, commonly called the yellow
or banana snake, which grew to a length of six or seven feet. It is
practically extinct, for during the last five or six years it has been
nearly impossible to find a specimen. This bloodthirsty little animal
has also nearly exterminated another ally of the cultivator, a certain
ground lizard (_Anolis corsalis_), which is now very rarely seen.

In its general appearance, except in point of size, it being much
larger, it may be stated that the mongoose very closely resembles the
common gray squirrel of the northern United States, although the latter
does not have feet and tail tipped with black.

       *       *       *       *       *

     Comparing the flint implements of palæolithic and neolithic
     age, Prof. T. McKenny Huse exhibited at the British Archæological
     Institute a series of flints to illustrate his view that in their
     earlier stages of manufacture the palæolithic and neolithic
     implements passed through the very same steps--that is, a block of
     flint was first rough dressed by both palæolithic and neolithic
     people into the same general form. The neolithic man merely
     proceeded further on the same lines, afterward finding out the
     way to grind the edge, and at last the whole implement. With
     few exceptions, the author said, neolithic flints were found on
     the surface or in artificial excavations; whereas, as a rule,
     palæolithic implements were found in deposits that seemed to be
     due to the sweeping down into hollows or river terraces of surface
     soils in or on which the implements and other stones lay.




THE CAUSE OF RAIN.[12]

BY J. E. PLUMANDON, METEOROLOGIST AT THE OBSERVATORY OF THE PUY-DE-DÔME.


A great many theories have been invented to explain the formation of
rain, some of which are remarkable chiefly for their absurdity or
their complexity. Even most of the scientific theories depend too
largely on hypotheses and are not sufficiently supported by facts.
There are, however, some which are as a whole established on authentic
observations, and, although they are still incomplete, they do not, like
some of the speculations, contradict facts that are observed every day.
For more than thirty years I have studied professionally and because I
had a taste for it all the atmospheric phenomena which came before me.
Several times I have been so fortunate as to witness, at Clermont, or on
the top of the Puy-de-Dôme, the genesis or development of heavy showers,
and have fancied that I have detected some of the details or secrets of
their formation. In a pamphlet on this subject, which I published in
1885, I expounded the ideas which a large number of observations on fog,
drizzle, mist, rain, snow, sleet, and hail had suggested to me; and by
means of some of these ideas, the resultant of facts observed hundreds
of times, I hope to be able to explain the formation of rain.

First, I must say that heat, and especially moisture, do not vary in
the lower part of the atmosphere in the way it was long thought. At
extreme altitudes the temperature of the air is very low, but the cold
does not increase regularly as we rise, and the same is the case with
the moisture. In high ascensions, or while sailing almost horizontal
courses, aëronauts traverse atmospheric regions alternately warm and
cold, dry and moist. Such anomalies present themselves even near the
surface. There are between eighty and a hundred days every year in which
a higher temperature is registered for a greater or less length of time
on the Puy-de-Dôme than at Clermont. Sometimes the difference is very
great. Thus, on the 26th of December, 1879, the temperature was -16°
C. at Clermont, while on the summit of the Puy-de-Dôme the thermometer
marked +5° C., showing a difference of 21° in favor of the top of the
mountain. Differences of temperature of this kind occur everywhere.
The moisture of the air varies in the same way through the atmosphere.
In ascending or descending a few hundred metres, the hygrometer may be
observed to pass from dryness to saturation. At the altitude of the
Puy-de-Dôme extreme moisture may succeed almost absolute dryness in a
few instants, in a clear sky and without any change of wind.

The parts of the atmosphere included within the same limits of
temperature or humidity therefore rarely form concentric or parallel
layers. They constitute regions interlacing zones which the clouds,
thick or scattered in groups, often mark to our eyes, showing us those
which are saturated with the vapor of water. The distribution of these
zones in space depends chiefly on the heat action of the sun, and upon
preceding and present movements of the atmosphere. Now, if a certain
increase of heat is adequate to melt a piece of ice and to transform the
water of the fusion into vapor, in like manner a corresponding cooling
may suffice to cause the vapor to return to the state of a liquid and
then to that of ice. The processes in the atmosphere are not different,
and all showers, results of the more or less extensive condensation of
the vapor of water, may arise from the cooling of that vapor or of the
water which it produces.

A certain volume of atmospheric air is capable of holding in suspension
a quantity of water proportioned to the elevation of its temperature.
But, for each determined temperature, there is a maximum which can not
be exceeded without the excess of vapor returning to the liquid state.
If, therefore, an atmospheric region is saturated with vapor, and its
temperature falls, that region will give rain. Immense and superabundant
causes for the cooling necessary to provoke rain exist in such an
atmosphere as we have described. The cooling may take effect in three
principal ways: first, by the radiation of different regions between
one another and toward interplanetary space, the temperature of which
is extremely low, as has been indicated by measurements made in high
balloon ascensions; second, by the expansion which air rising in the
atmosphere undergoes in being rarefied; and, third, by the mingling of
masses of warm or moist air with cold or dry.

Cooling by mixture is the sufficient cause in the majority of cases;
and this may be effected from above, by descent of the air from the
upper regions; from below, by ascent, with the assistance of rising
currents created by solar radiations; or, finally, in any and every
direction under the influence of the winds and the general movements of
the atmosphere. Furthermore, the cooling need not be very great in order
to provoke rain under certain conditions of temperature and humidity of
frequent occurrence.

Rain clouds very frequently descend a little below the altitude of the
Puy-de-Dôme. It is, therefore, not difficult, in order to determine the
degree of cooling necessary for the formation of rain, to take advantage
of observations that have been made there. The hygrometer sometimes
remains near saturation without there being precipitation of vapor;
and, supposing that the temperature is near 3° or 4° C., which is about
the mean temperature of the year, it will require a cooling of only one
or two degrees centigrade at most for the air to be unable to hold all
its vapor and for the excess of it to be transformed into rain. This is
confirmed by experiment and observation.

I will mention a remarkable example illustrating this point. Not rarely,
when the west wind is blowing violently on the top of the Puy-de-Dôme,
an east wind, blowing opposite to it, prevails at Clermont. Then an eddy
is formed behind the plateau and the chain of puys that runs from north
to south, a little west of Clermont. This eddy gradually becomes a vast
whirlwind with a horizontal axis, several leagues long, a few kilometres
wide, and seven hundred or eight hundred metres high. It commonly gives
rise to an abundant and continuous formation of black clouds, which
appear in an instant along its length, following its intersection
with the upper current. The phenomenon is frequent, and is sometimes
produced under very interesting conditions, as on a certain day when
the temperature at Clermont was five degrees above zero, centigrade,
while the hygrometer indicated that the air contained seven tenths of
the quantity of vapor required for saturation. Under such conditions
the temperature on the Puy-de-Dôme would have only had to be a very
little above the freezing point for the vapor of the horizontal eddy to
be transformed into rain on meeting the upper current coming from the
west. Now, on the top of the mountain the thermometer marked 4°C. below
the freezing point. Hence, every time the lower east wind increased a
little, this having the effect of carrying the vapor and the air of the
lower regions a little higher, the black clouds could be seen developing
with a recrudescence of intensity. A few instants afterward a torrential
rain fell at Clermont.

In some cases--and such frequently occur in summer--the mingling of
strata of air of different temperatures is effected by ascending
currents. The sky is clear; the moist air in contact with the soil is
warmed under the action of the sun, rises, and more or less quickly
reaches a much colder stratum. Light mists are formed; they may
frequently be seen rising and spreading out over the warmer or moister
spots. On the flanks of the Puy-de-Dôme one may often find himself among
ascending currents of this sort which succeed one another intermittingly
when the air is calm, after a rain; they rise with a velocity of four or
five metres at least per second.

These fogs finally become stationary in a region of the same density
with themselves. There they accumulate and form a cloud or a group of
clouds that go on developing. When penetrated by the rays of the sun,
which they almost wholly absorb, these clouds are warmed up again in
the interior, and budding protuberances are seen, which are especially
developed on the upper parts of the cloud. These protuberances are
formed and grow so rapidly as to almost suggest the presence of a
steam generator within every cloud. The external parts of the cloud,
however, cool very soon by radiation, evaporation, or dissolution,
but especially by their contact with the cold air, into which they
continue going. Hence, when the vapors emitted by the cloud reach its
periphery, they are cooled at once as if in a condenser; they then
take on a rapid movement of descent, which is easily distinguished,
and suffer condensation in their lower parts. As the surface of the
cloud in contact with the cold air around it is considerable in
proportion to that which receives the influence of the solar rays, the
warm ascending currents slacken speed and are extinguished, because
the cloudy mass, drawn on by the higher currents, removes from the
place where it is formed, or because it stops the rays of the sun and
prevents their reaching the ground. There results a more and more
complete condensation, and the watery vapor is at last transformed into
drops of rain. The condensation into rain is accelerated and augmented
when the mass of cloud rises with great rapidity, especially when it
enters abruptly into very cold atmospheric strata. A sudden mixture
of the cloud with the air around it takes place then, and sudden and
abundant rains result like those which are produced at the instant of
thunderstorms.

The formation and mixture of masses of air of different temperatures
are effected by ascending currents in zones of restricted extent, but
sometimes very numerous. Local showers and thunderstorms are produced
in this way. The phenomenon becomes much more important and at the same
time extends over vast regions, when it is brought about by the aid of
the wind and the larger movements of the atmosphere, and general rains
result.

Babinet, in his Studies on the Sciences of Observation, explains the
formation of rain by supposing that when the wind meets an obstacle,
it ascends; the moving air cools in rarefying, and deposits its excess
of vapor over saturation. This fact, when it occurs, should indeed
contribute to the condensation of the vapor contained in the air; but it
does not afford an adequate explanation of all rains; for, first, how
can it rain on the vast oceans which present no obstacles to cause the
air to ascend? It is necessary to suppose that internal movements of the
atmosphere intervene in the production of rain.

Monk, Mason, de Saussure, and many others fix the prime condition for
the formation of rain in the superposition of two beds of cloud. This
assertion, although it is still repeated in a number of treatises
on physics, is inexact. A single stratum of cloud--yes, a solitary
cloud--has been seen, on the Puy-de-Dôme, to produce rain and lightning,
with thunder.

Frequently, under the influence of the centers of perturbation which
often exist south of the Alps, a vast sea of clouds, the upper face of
which does not exceed an altitude varying from seven hundred to twelve
hundred metres, covers all central France, and probably other countries.
Only the high table-lands and mountains rise above this stratum of
clouds over which the sun shines in a perfectly clear sky. Yet rain is
found in such strata of clouds, however homogeneous they may be, and
it rains in the regions they cover. I have long been able to affirm
this fact, important because it destroys old errors elaborated in the
isolation of the study, and to support it with authentic proof.

We may witness the formation of rain when we rise into the usual region
of the clouds, either in balloon ascents or by climbing mountains.

The phenomenon may be observed under five aspects: First, we may
find ourselves in a fog of greater or less thickness, the hygrometer
indicating that the air is nearly saturated with vapor, without one
being able to detect the fall of the smallest liquid particle, and
without exterior objects being moistened. Second, while we can not
observe the fall of a single liquid drop, however small, everything
enveloped in the cloud will be rapidly moistened. We are in the
atmospheric stratum where the rain is beginning to form. Inhabitants
of mountainous regions say at such times that there is a wet fog. At
the top of the Puy-de-Dôme, when this condition lasts for a day, we can
collect three, four, or five millimetres of water. Third, we may remark,
in the fog, the fall of exceedingly fine droplets, which we can hardly
distinguish--it is drizzling. Fourth, the rain is falling, while we are
still in the fog; and, fifth, the rain is falling and we are below the
fog--that is, below the clouds.

These five aspects may be present in the same cloud, when we will find
them in the order given in successive strata, one beneath another; so
that, entering such a cloud from the upper part, we may traverse, in
regular order, "dry" fog, wet fog, fog with drizzle, fog with rain, and,
as we leave the cloud at the bottom, rain without fog. Mr. Glaisher,
the English scientific aëronaut, thus records his experience in an
ascension he made July 1, 1863: "We let ourselves drop at eight hundred
metres, and went into a fog which was dry for the first thirty metres,
but shortly afterward became moist. As we descended, the fog seemed to
become more charged with water, and seemed very dark beneath us; at five
hundred or six hundred metres we heard the sound of the rain striking
the trees, so violent was the fall."

Rain drops, in fact, grow as they fall, whether by continuance of
condensation, or by union with other drops. They should, therefore, be
larger when they issue from the cloud in proportion as the region where
drizzle is formed is higher above the base of the cloud. There is,
however, a limit to the size they can attain, for the velocity of their
fall increases with their mass, and they are divided by the resistance
of the air.

The five aspects under which we have regarded the formation of rain are
evidently five phases distinguished by our senses in the progressive
transformation which the vapor of water undergoes in passing to the
liquid state. It also sometimes happens that the condensation of the
vapor in a cloud can only reach the first or second stage of the
transformation without extending to the other stages. At other times it
stops at the third phase, that of drizzling, which may then, as rain
does, cross atmospheric regions below the cloud, and reach the ground,
provided the base of the cloud is not too high and the air passed
through is not too dry. In short, we may conclude that the formation of
rain is due simply to variations in the temperature and moisture of the
air. There is, however, another element, the intervention of which is
indispensable, if not to reduce the vapor to water, at least to cause
that water to fall in rain, or under the form of drops. This element is
the atmospheric dust.

We designate generally as atmospheric dust all the corpuscles which the
atmospheric envelope of the earth holds in suspension; but distinctions
should be made. Some dust occurs in the air fortuitously and for the
moment, such as troubles us in dry weather when the wind is blowing.
This is coarse, and so evident that we say "It is dusty," and soon falls
by its weight to the ground. There is other dust which remains in the
air almost permanently. It becomes visible to the eye when illuminated
against a dark background, as when a sunbeam comes into a dark room.
Other dust may be studied under a microscope of low power; and still
other, and the largest proportion of that in the atmosphere, is so
fine that it can not be distinguished, even with the most powerful
instruments.

This extremely fine and light dust is disseminated to heights that may
exceed fifteen or twenty or more miles. Cyclones, volcanic eruptions,
and immense prairie fires are the principal causes of its production
and expansion in the atmosphere. Mr. Aitken, a Scotch meteorologist,
has made some remarkable experiments to demonstrate the existence of
this dust. For that purpose he employed a very ingenious method, which
permitted him to count all the particles, even those which could not be
seen with a microscope. The principle of his method is as follows: If
we fill a receiver with air that has been deprived of all its dust by
passing it through a liquid, and saturate it with vapor, and then by
cooling cause the vapor to condense, the resultant water is deposited
directly. If the receiver is filled with air not cleared of its dust,
the cooling of the mixture of air and vapor provokes first the formation
of a fog that marks the presence of dust, because each particle of dust
becomes a nucleus, a center of condensation, for the vapor. Finally,
if the cooling is carried far enough, the water formed falls in very
fine droplets, each one of which incloses a dust particle. Mr. Aitken
has succeeded in counting these droplets, by introducing only a very
small volume of dusty air into the receiver and finally filling it with
absolutely pure air. He has thus found that the external air contains
on the average 32,000 particles of dust per cubic centimetre after a
rain of considerable duration, and 130,000 particles in fine weather.
There are 1,860,000 particles in the same volume of air in the middle
of a room, and 5,420,000 particles near the ceiling. The figures look
fanciful, but they are exact, for they have been corroborated by
numerous consistent experiments and agree with the determinations that
have been made by other methods.

As to the formation of rain, it should be observed that absolutely pure
air can not give either fog or drops of water when it is supersaturated
with vapor. If there were no dust in the atmosphere we should have no
clouds or rain. The sky would always be clear, and the sun would shine
uninterruptedly as long as it was above the horizon. There would be no
dawn or twilight, and day and night would succeed one another instantly,
without transition. Atmospheric water would be deposited only when in
contact with things, as in Aitken's experiments, very much as dew is
deposited.

The causes of the formation of rain are evidently the same everywhere.
The secondary conditions change only according to climates; but they
vary so much that rains are distributed very unequally over the earth.
According to Desanis, the quantity of vapor contained in a column of
air as high as the atmosphere would give, in France, a layer of water
about four centimetres thick. Few rain storms would furnish so much;
but there are storms sometimes that give much more. On August 17, 1888,
seven centimetres of water fell at Clermont in five hours; and September
12, 1875, the pluviometer measured ten centimetres for the whole day.
Still more copious rains fall in some tropical countries; at Purneah, in
India, eighty-nine centimetres have fallen in twenty-four hours.

Mr. John Murray has calculated, from the charts of Elias Loomis, that
the quantity of rain falling every year over the whole earth would form
a bed of water averaging nine hundred and seventy millimetres in depth.

When we consider the annual quantities of rain in particular regions or
localities, we find the numbers exceedingly variable, and some of them
surprising. Clermont receives 630 millimetres, and the mean of the fall
in Europe is about the same. About one metre falls on the western coast
of Iceland, two metres in Norway, 2.80 metres in Scotland, 4.60 metres
at Vera Cruz, 5.20 metres at Buitenzorg, in the Dutch East Indies, 7.10
metres at Maranhão, Brazil, and 12.50 metres at Cherrapunji, in British
India. On the other hand, it rarely rains in some regions of the globe
north and south of the equator; as in the center of the Sahara and of
Arabia, the plateau of eastern Persia and Beluchistan, the desert of
Kalahari, and the desert of Atacama. The plains or pampas of the eastern
slopes of the Andes, in about 23° south latitude, are likewise subject
to extreme droughts, in one of which, lasting three years, three million
head of cattle perished.--_Translated for the Popular Science Monthly
from Ciel et Terre._

FOOTNOTE:

[12] An address before the Society of Horticulture and Viticulture at
Clermont-Ferrand.




DREAM AND REALITY.

BY M. CAMILLE MELINAND.


There is a very striking resemblance between dreams and waking
perceptions. We see in dreams objects, persons, and events identical
with those of the waking state. The belief in their reality is as
complete as in that of what we see when awake; the emotions are as deep
and vivid. Pleasures have a delicious savor, and pains are even more
intense than those of the reality--as, for instance, those of nightmare,
and the distresses to which we give ourselves up in full. In all cases
these dream troubles seem as real as those of life, and are taken by us
quite as seriously; and the existence of everything we see and feel is
as evident as in life.

Still we oppose the dream to the reality. The waking world is our true,
our only world; the world of the dream seems to us purely interior and
chimerical. The incoherence and absurdity of our dreams surprise and
amuse us, and we are amazed to find that we have been able to believe,
while asleep, in such foolish things. In short, dreaming is synonymous
to us with illusion, phantasmagoria, and falsehood. The clearest of
the prevailing theories about dreams rest upon the postulate that
waking perceptions are the true ones, and the visions of the dream are
false. They have answers to the three questions we are used to ask
concerning dreams--Where do they come from? why are they incoherent?
and why do we take their visions for realities? They explain dreams
as former sensations reviving within us under different combinations,
and as therefore simply confused reflexes of the reality. Dreams may,
however, sometimes be produced by a present impression suffered by one
of our senses, half awakened--a contact, the way we are lying, and the
condition of the organic functions being thus the causes or occasions
of dreams. The incoherence of dreams seems no more mysterious in these
theories, and is explained as the result of two causes--the slumber of
the "reflecting" faculties, judgment, reason, the will, the exercise of
choice and control; and, secondly, the unrestricted reign of imagination
and the association of ideas. Our faith in the reality of the things
dreamed is accounted for by the mechanical play of the images, the law
being set up that every image that is not opposed by stronger images
appears to us a real object. The problem, therefore, resolves itself:
the senses being asleep, the images that arise within us are not
contradicted by normal sensations, and that is why we take them for
realities. Further, our reflective faculties, being likewise dormant,
can not contradict the images, in the absence of sensations, reasonings,
or recollections. Hence a credence, as absolute as unreasonable. We
purpose to show that there is something artificial and prejudiced in the
classical theory of opposition between dreams and waking, which assigns
illusion, confusion, and incoherence to the former, and solid and
permanent reality to the latter, and that the difference between them is
not so clean cut.

Most persons in talking of this subject say that they are sure of the
reality of things when awake because their different senses concur in
attesting it. They see a tree, and satisfy themselves that it is a tree
by going up and touching it. They smell a rose, and go find the rose,
look at it and handle it; while in dreams we are not able to apply
these supplementary tests. The distinction is imaginary, for our senses
likewise seem to support one another in dreams. We dream not only that
we see an object, but also that we feel and hear it. When I dream of
meeting a friend, I believe that I see him and shake hands with him and
hear him speak. There is, therefore, a complete identity of the two
conditions as to this point, and the thing that appears to me in a dream
is a "bundle of sensations," visual, tactile, auditive, muscular, and
often olfactory, just as it appears to me when awake.

We are told of another difference. When awake, we find others agreeing
with us in recognizing the reality of things. I see a tree, and so
do those with me; I show it to them, and they look at it; I feel of
it, and they touch it; I hear the rustling of the leaves, and so do
they. Our perceptions in practical life are thus tested by comparison
with those of others, whereas in our dreams we have our solitary and
fanciful visions all within ourselves, with none to participate in our
perceptions of them.

This supposed contrast is no more real than the former one. What is
true is that when we are once awake we change our point of view, and our
vision of the night then seems to have been wholly interior, solitary,
and subjective. But, notwithstanding the common illusion, _while we are
dreaming_ affairs pass, to us, exactly as when we are awake. It is true
that in the waking state we find ourselves mingled with other men, who
perceive the same objects that we do. Do we not sometimes dream that we
are one of an audience looking at a play? that we are talking with a
friend, and exchange views with him? and that we understand one another
perfectly? There is, therefore, in this aspect, not a difference but
identity between the dream and the waking. The interior condition, the
sensation, the credence, are identical. The dreaming man believes, sees,
and feels himself in intercourse with his fellows, just as the man awake
believes, sees, and feels it. When we wake, we discover our mistake, but
what of that? It does not prevent us from believing completely in it
while we are asleep. And this is the point; for, after all, am I sure
that I shall not awake some day from what I now call my waking life? And
who knows whether I shall not then judge that I have been dreaming a
solitary dream? It may be added that the agreement of witnesses is not a
decisive sign by which to distinguish the reality from the dream. There
are collective hallucinations.

We come now to a more important difference, which includes the principle
and has a characteristic apparently essentially distinguishing the
dream--its looseness, disorder, inconstancy, and incoherence. In the
dream visions succeed one another without connection; no law determines
their order; an unrestricted fancy reigns among them, and the normal is
broken up in them at every point. We are transported instantaneously
from one country to another. We pass without transition from childhood
to age, and causes have the strangest effects. The most essential laws
of thought are constantly violated. There are facts without any causes,
metamorphoses, magical disappearances. Even the absurd is realized,
and the "principle of contradiction" does not seem to be any more
respected than the others. We are at the same time in two places; we
pronounce words, we hold conversations of which we can not when we
wake recover the thread, so strange is their logic, so fugitive the
sense, and so fanciful the combination. A practiced psychologist, M.
Delbœuf, succeeded in taking down in the morning the last phrase of a
book which he had been reading in a dream, and which had seemed then
remarkably lucid. Here it is: "The man raised by the woman and separated
by aberrations pushes facts disengaged by the analysis of the tertiary
nature into the way of progress."

Is this distinction, then--that the dream is incoherent and the real
rational--any more just than the others? It is doubtful if it is.
There are rare dreams in which everything proceeds in a regular and
natural way; and, on the other hand, reality is not always exempt from
capriciousness and improbability. But to me the capital objection to
the distinction is that it is illusory, and the contrast between the
disorder of dreams and the coherence of the real is only apparent. The
dream, it is true, appears disordered to us, but that is when we are
awake. An essential point which we always ignore is that _while we are
dreaming_ everything seems simple and normal and regular to us. We are
not at all astonished at what happens. We find it all right to be in two
countries at the same time, and we understand very well how one person
can be changed into another. The conversations we have--those which are
utterly unthinkable when we are awake--usually appear to us marvelously
lucid, and we admire the ease, the _verve_, and the luminous continuity
of our words. We enjoy that moving with so much suppleness and precision
among ideas; our demonstrations are infinitely convincing; and it is
perhaps in the dream that we have the most perfect sense of evidence.

Everything, then, that passes in the dream is--to the dreamer--as
natural as events in the waking condition. When awake, events seem,
without exception, natural and regular; they also seem natural and
regular in the dream. It is true that we find them absurd when we wake,
but what of that? They are absurd only by comparison, as looked at from
the point of view of the waking man, who is no longer the same that he
was when dreaming. Who can tell if we shall not awake some day from what
we now call our waking condition, and that we shall not then find the
events absurd that we now consider rational and real? Who can tell that
we shall not be stupefied at having been so firmly attached to invisible
phantoms and disordered combinations?

In setting up a fourth distinction it is said that real life forms a
continuous whole, while dreams are not connected with one another. The
series of my days forms a single life, which holds together. I resume
to-day my life of yesterday, and shall resume to-morrow my life of
to-day. While I am asleep, the course of it is only suspended. I begin
again in the morning at the very point where I stopped in the evening.
I find myself in the same medium, occupied with the same thoughts,
subject to the same cares, involved in the same routine of events, the
same storm of passions. The same thread runs through it all. On the
other hand, it is said, our dreams do not form a consecutive existence.
The dream of one night has no connection with the dream of the previous
night. On going to sleep to-night I have no assurance that I shall find
the landscapes or the personages or the circumstances of my last dream.
The most diabolical nightmare may succeed a most delightful romance.
In short, not only is the form of the same dream incoherent, but our
successive dreams are incoherent as to one another. This was what struck
Pascal when he wrote: "If we dreamed the same dreams every night, we
should be affected by them as we are by things we see every day; and
if an artisan was sure to dream every night, for twelve hours, that he
was a king, I believe he would be nearly as happy as a king who dreamed
every night, for twelve hours, that he was an artisan.... But because
dreams are all different, and the same one is so diversified, what we
see in one affects us much less than what we see when awake, because of
the continuity of the waking life, which is not so continuous and even,
however, but that it changes, too, though less abruptly, if only rarely,
as when we travel; and then we say, 'It seems like a dream to me,' for
life is a somewhat less inconstant dream."

What are we to say to this distinction? I do not believe it is necessary
to take it seriously, any more than the others. When is it that we pass
judgment on the discontinuity and incoherence between our successive
dreams? Not while we are dreaming them. When I am dreaming, I seem to
be pursuing a life that has always been the same. I have no sort of an
impression that the present dream has been preceded by different dreams
having no connection with it. I have, on the contrary, exactly as I have
when awake, the impression of an indefinite and single series of events,
of an unrolling of them without arrest and without break. There is,
therefore, on this point, no difference, but another resemblance between
the dream and the reality, and the same impression of continuity and
unity prevails in both. It is true that the aspect changes in waking,
and our several dreams then appear detached from one another. But what
of that? Are we sure that we shall not awake some day from what we now
call the waking state, and find then that that state, continuous in
appearance, was in reality composed of a series of separate, incoherent,
and incongruous fragments?

Thus we are all the time coming upon the same illusion. We judge of
the dream, not by what it is, but by what it seems to have been after
we have waked. Instead of observing the impressions of the dreaming
man while he is dreaming, we take notice of what he thinks about them
after he has waked up. This is to falsify the comparison of the normal
and dream life by regarding the normal life while we are in it, and the
dream life when we have come out of it. The several other difficulties
on which psychologists have insisted are capable of solution by the
application of the same principle: the seeming suspension of the will;
the want of correspondence of the moral standards of the dream with
those of the waking condition; the confusion of temporal duration
and sequence; and the transformations of personality and character,
concerning which I would ask, however, if the eccentricities betrayed
are not rather in the nature of more complete exposure. I have sometimes
been surprised at the psychological revelations of dreams; faults and
weaknesses that we do not avow when in the normal condition reveal
themselves then with inexorable frankness; we yield to temptations that
we evaded when awake, though inclined to them; to wickednesses which
we kept closely shut up within us; reveal antipathies which we had
dissimulated. Base desires break out, latent loves declare themselves,
and things take place which, as in a play, bring the farthest depths of
our hearts into the light; and when we wake we say: "That is true; it
is just what I should have done under like circumstances. I had never
thought of it, and I am not proud of it, but it is so."

There is this real distinction between the dream and the waking state:
that when awake I know there is another condition, while in the dream
I take no thought of the waking state. Awake, I know that I have been
living the fantastic dream life, and have come out of it into a real
life completely distinct from the other. I am in a first state, and know
there is a second. But when I am dreaming I have no thought of another
state that I have come out of and must return to; I do not feel that
there is another existence, radically separated from this one; and I
never compare the visions of my dreams with my waking world, for I know
nothing of it. I have the impression of having always lived the life I
am in, which seems natural; and even if I ask whether I am not dreaming,
it is a merely verbal expression, with no accompanying sense of the
meaning of it. Another distinction, and the only absolutely clear one,
is that while we always wake from the dream, we never wake from the
reality. This is why we believe in the reality and not in the dream.

These two differences are differences in degree, but they do not
necessarily indicate differences in nature. Similar facts are frequent
among hypnotics. We may plunge them into a condition of somnambulism
which we will call a second state; and then, from that, magnetize them
over again into another somnambulism, which we call the third state.
Now the curious fact comes to pass that the subject in the third state
recollects the second state, but when in the second state again, knows
nothing of having been in the third state. "Lucie 3," says M. Pierre
Janet, "recollected her normal life perfectly; she also recollected
previous somnambulisms, and all that Lucie 2 had said.... It was a
long and hard task to awaken this subject after she had passed a few
minutes in the syncope already described. She then returned to ordinary
somnambulism, but Lucie 2 could not tell me a word of what had happened
to Lucie 3, and supposed she had been asleep and said nothing." Thus we
have the same difference between two successive stages of somnambulism
as between the dream and the waking state. But as the stages 2 and 3 are
evidently of the same nature, so we have a right to suppose that the
dream and the waking, whose phenomena as to each other are similar, are
likewise of the same nature.

In the ordinary experience of mankind we do not awake from our normal
condition; but is it proved that there is never any awakening, any
third state into which we may pass? The supposition of some such state
into which we pass by death is one of the fundamentals of nearly all
religions; and in this sense we might contemplate the possibility of an
awakening in which we shall be astonished at having given ourselves up
go completely to the world of sense, at having taken a passing state for
the definite one, an ephemeral world for the sole and absolute world, a
provisional existence for the real one.

Even among men as we find them, we see some making an approach to a
third state, if not living in it. What is science but the revelation
of a new world, different from the visible one? When we see light and
colors, they tell us of an invisible ether with particles vibrating with
almost incalculable rapidity; when we hear faint or loud sounds, sharp
or grave, they tell of the more or less ample and rapid vibrations of
matter. When we perceive a multiple or varied reality, it shows us the
single phenomenon of motion. These formulas do not, however, signify, as
some mistake, that light, color, and sound do not exist, but that there
is something else; and that if we could gain new senses, a new universe
would open out to us. This means, simply, that the scientific man is
already half waked up from his ordinary life, and has half entered a new
world.

Metaphysics is a waking up of this kind. A metaphysician who really
believes his doctrines, like Plato or Spinoza, is already living in a
new world and contemplating the supposed reality in which we are still
immersed as a matter of indifference away off in the dim twilight. To
him, what we regard as reality is only appearance, while the eternal
rain of atoms or the play of immaterial forces, or whatever he supposes
the world to be made of, is the true reality.

Religion is another such awakening, and to the devout man this life
is only a provisional one, a trial, the prelude to the true life; and
while he may regard the world of sense as real too, he looks forward
to the superior reality, which it is the privilege of the elect to
contemplate; and it is some feeling of this kind that has sustained
martyrs and has incited men of all ages and all faiths to suffer and
endure, and die for what they believe.--_Translated for the Popular
Science Monthly from the Revue des Deux Mondes._




A PRACTICAL DUTCH CHARITY.

BY J. H. GORE.


Holland, Scotland, and Switzerland, quite unlike physically, have in
their institutions many points of similarity, and the impulses and
character of their people are almost identical. In religious matters the
resemblance is also striking, even though the creed professed be known
by different names.

In Scotland the struggle for existence demands something more assertive
than the doctrine of _laissez faire_; the terrible sweep of the
avalanche in Switzerland, without any apparent cause for its starting,
suggests an acceptance of the belief that "it is, because it must be";
while Holland, in its incessant war with the sea, is continually bidding
defiance to natural laws, and protesting against their unrestrained
action.

Calvinism found its strongest adherents in the two countries first
named, and the faith of Luther answering to the active instincts of
the Batavian race was at once adopted by it. In Holland as well as in
Switzerland man is ever reminded of life's realities by the watchful
care necessary for his very existence, and the material obstacles which
must be conquered at every step. Patriotism never becomes dormant
because the face of the land shows in its scars its history, and love
for home grows with each reckoning of the cost of its retention. The
possessions of one day are in many instances no guarantee of the wealth
of the next, and the hand now extended in giving assistance may on the
morrow be held out to receive. Thus we find the charitable instincts
always awake, and societies for the relief of the needy thoroughly
organized.

The conditions under which Holland began its geographic formation and
the processes afterward employed to hold or enlarge her boundaries,
together with the social unrest of the time, caused thoughtful men to
put in operation every agency that could direct the innate desire to do
good and to give direction to the forces within the kingdom, as well as
those which came from without. In Holland, therefore, we find numerous
societies for the relief of suffering humanity, and people ever ready
to give due attention to the complaints and necessities of the laboring
classes. No other country offers such an excellent field for the study
of charitable institutions. The Dutch are eminently practical; they made
an early beginning in the work of alleviating distress, and this relief,
from the nature of things, as pointed out, is not spasmodic as in other
countries where nothing short of famine, earthquakes, or floods can
awaken the people to a realization of the duty they owe to mankind. Here
the call for aid may come at any time, so that those charitably inclined
must be ever ready to respond, and the organizations for relief can
never become lax or inefficient.

Then, too, the population of the Netherlands is very homogeneous, and
the leaders in all good works are not only administering to their own
people, but are unbiased by prior experiences under other auspices.
Consequently, this country furnishes institutions organized under normal
conditions, with an entire absence of external influences, and where the
helped and the helpers are of the same race.

England, France, and Germany have sent commissions to Holland to study
its organized charity, its school system, workingmen's societies, and
like institutions. These countries have but little in common, even
though their forms of government are, or have been, outwardly similar,
while on the other hand we have always found in the Dutchman "a friend
and a brother," and an example well worthy of following. And since it
is only after examining remedies for evils found without complications,
that we can prescribe for abnormal conditions, the study of Dutch
institutions is the best possible preparation for arriving at the means
for meeting the necessities in our own country.

In Holland the general awakening to the demands of the people came in
the eighteenth century, when the social life was lacking in strength,
when the rich were largely given over to extravagance, while the poor
were neglected, uneducated, and exposed to want. Everything seemed to
separate the two classes--nothing emphasized their interdependence. The
citizen class was restive under these oppressive conditions, and needed
only the successful example of some neighboring people to start the
revolution within their own country.

There was in the Netherlands at this time at least one thoughtful man
who foresaw the approaching social revolution and realized the danger
which threatened his native land if unaccustomed rights and powers
should become the possession of those who heretofore had felt the power
of others. This man was Jan Nieuwenhuizen, the founder of the Society
of General Welfare. It is impossible to estimate the good which has
been accomplished by this organization. It instituted free schools, and
gave to the state the scheme on which the present public-school system
rests; it established savings banks, and the Postal Savings Bank--now
the model of the world--was glad to copy after them; it conducts a sort
of neighborhood loaning banks, and it is likely that its plans will be
incorporated in the agricultural banks now under consideration. Through
its instrumentality people of different classes are brought together in
periodical meetings, when the lower can learn by observation from the
higher, and lose much of the prejudice and envy which is so often felt,
while the higher will become more tolerant toward the lower as they
realize the burdens which the latter carry, and appreciate the obstacles
which mar their progress, thus leveling many of the artificial class
distinctions.

What this society has done for Holland, "Ons Huis" is trying to
accomplish in Amsterdam; and though the latter is occupying a more
limited field, its energies are more concentrated and its methods are
such as to warrant its characterization as a practical charity.

The founder of "Our House," Mr. Janssen, fully realized that outright
giving while blessing the giver is of questionable value to the
recipient, and alms once accepted suggested in the ease with which it
was obtained that a second be asked for, and the feeling of dependence
soon calls into existence the belief that the uncontracted debt of a
living must be collected. We therefore find a charitable organization
in which everything must be purchased, but at cost so slight as to be
within the reach of all, yet being a charge, no benefit is esteemed for
naught because it was obtained for nothing.

We find this unique society in a sort of "people's palace" in the very
center of Amsterdam's working population. The building, which is the
gift of Mr. Janssen, is on Rozen Street, Nos. 12, 14, and 16, extending
through to Rozen Gracht, and contains a board room, reading room,
library, gymnasium, lecture room, assembly rooms, large hall, kitchen,
quarters for the janitor's family, and a restaurant.

The purpose is declared to be "to promote the moral and material
development of the people--poor as well as rich--both in giving and
receiving by inducing those who are blessed with knowledge or money to
assist their fellow-beings whose lives are monotonous and devoid of
comforts and pleasures." The very name--"Our House"--is intended to show
that within its walls all enjoy equal rights, that the less learned are
the younger members of the family whom the less ignorant will gladly
instruct, and that the purposes and aims of all classes should be the
same. Both sexes have equal privileges, and the religious and political
views of those who attend the meetings or enjoy the benefits offered are
never inquired into. The adherents of all faiths are treated with equal
deference, and the only condition imposed is the observance of such
principles of etiquette as should find favor in every home.

Since the day of rest of the various religious sects is not the
same, all days are regarded as of equal importance, but, to meet the
objections of the Protestant clergy that the exercises here kept
people away from the church services, it has been decided not to open
the building on Sundays until noon. But as the hours of employment of
many persons are so long that their evenings are not free, the reading
room is open on this day after the hour named, and certain instructive
lectures are given during the afternoon. At these the average attendance
is about five hundred. A strong effort was made to have the building
closed during the whole of Sunday, however. The argument was made that
as long as beer gardens and places of amusement were open on this day,
the people should not be restricted on the only holiday of the week to
those places where money is spent for trifling pleasures. The large
number of persons who spend Sunday afternoon in the reading room proves
that the opportunity to make good use of their time is fully appreciated.

Before giving in detail the plan of work in hand, it should be said that
the director has secured the assistance of about one hundred and fifty
men and women who are willing to contribute their time to the furthering
of the purposes as outlined. They are divided into fourteen groups,
or committees, each looking after a single interest. The means as at
present constituted for attaining the ends in view may be classified as
follows:

1. Reading room for men and women not under eighteen years of age; open
daily.

2. Wednesday evening lectures on literature, history, physics, pedagogy,
political economy, and travel. These lectures are open for debate.

3. Courses of lectures on different topics for men and women separately,
or for both together. These discussions are marked by an intimate tone.

4. Sunday evening meetings: musical or theatrical performances,
magic-lantern pictures, tableaux, etc. These are given in the large
hall, which accommodates five hundred and twenty-five persons.

5. Legal advice.

6. Clubs for boys, girls, men, and women. Friendly intercourse.
Discussions on scientific subjects. Chess club. Travel club.

7. Lessons in Dutch, French, English, and German, bookkeeping, reading
and writing for adults, needlework, mending, making and cutting of one's
own clothes, cooking, drilling for boys and girls, fencing, acting,
chorus singing.

The reading room is provided with a large number of daily and weekly
papers, magazines, and technical journals, together with such books as
could be purchased or obtained as donations. The user of the reading
room pays ten cents a quarter, with the privilege of bringing one friend
a week as a guest. Every conceivable device is employed to induce
visitors to make use of the books; for example, the lecturers frequently
choose a literary topic, and refer to the books in the library, or one
of the members of certain manual-training classes read aloud while
the others work. Then some of the social evenings are given up to the
discussion of a new or popular author, and persons skilled in reading
aloud are asked to read or recite choice extracts. To accommodate those
who feel that three months' subscription is for too long a period, the
regular admission fee of two Dutch cents--equivalent to eight tenths of
a cent of our money--gives the right to make use of the library during
the visit. It now looks as though the impulse to secure a shortening of
the work day would come from this organization in its desire to secure
for its beneficiaries a longer time in which to profit by the use of the
books and special opportunities for study here placed at the disposal
of the workingmen. The reading room is looked after by a committee of
twenty, some of whom are always present to give aid and advice to the
readers, to answer such questions as may arise, and to keep the books
and papers in place.

The lectures conducted in Our House are of a twofold
character--individual discourses and a series of discussions of a given
topic. Every Wednesday evening between November and April is provided
with a speaker by the lecture committee, who treats in a popular manner
a subject of his own choice, and allows the auditors at the close of his
talk to ask questions regarding the topic in hand. The average number of
persons attending these lectures last winter was about three hundred,
and the charge for a single admission is two cents, with a considerable
reduction when four or six tickets are purchased for one family. In the
course lecture the most popular topic so far has been natural science,
especially botany, physics, and chemistry. In this connection it is
interesting to note that the luxuriant flora of the East Indies, with
which the Dutch became acquainted long ago, gave an impetus in Holland
to the study of botany. The people of all classes are fond of plants and
flowers, and it is not surprising to learn that twenty persons followed
a course of instruction in botany. A prominent physician of Amsterdam
gave a course of ten lectures upon "The First Aid to the Injured,"
and eighty men and women profited by the practical discussion of this
subject. The cost of these lectures is four cents apiece.

Somewhat related to the above are the concerts, Sunday evening meetings,
and performances of various kinds which are given under the auspices of
the appropriate committees. Perhaps one of the most profitable evenings
of the winter is when manufacturers and employers are invited to
meet those of the working class who may wish to be present to discuss
in an informal manner questions of common interest. Under the genial
leadership of Mr. Janssen and the director, much of the restraint usual
on such occasions is thrown aside and the employer and employee sit side
by side, and each listens to the undreamed opinions and experiences of
the other. At one of these meetings the question of a shorter work day
was discussed from the standpoint of the employer, the laborer, and the
humanitarian. The investigations of our own Bureau of Labor were quoted
to show the benefits resulting from a shortening of the day of work, and
it is more than likely that the outcome of the discussion will be an
intention on the part of the manufacturer to curtail the hours of work
just as soon as possible, while the laborers, in learning of obstacles
of which they were ignorant, will await more patiently the action
desired.

The classes or individual pupils contribute their services to the
committee in charge of entertainments. This committee sees to it that
three Sunday evenings of each month are provided for, either from the
ranks of home talent or with the aid of outside artists. In the concerts
some of the best performers of the land have gladly taken part, and the
music of the greatest composers has been heard here. As in all other
cases, there is a charge for admission--four cents for one and six
cents for man and wife. A feature here in vogue might well be copied.
In arranging the selections for a concert the effort is made to always
include at least one popular piece, or a song of national, artistic,
or patriotic interest; then on the programme the words of this song
are printed. The audience may be asked to join in the chorus, but even
if this is not practical the people can catch the air, and with the
words before them in later days they can make melody in their homes.
If we recall the class of people for whom these provisions are made,
and keep in mind the limited avenues of enjoyment open to them, we will
appreciate the boon of such a considerate act.

It might be tedious to enumerate the various classes here conducted, and
give even in brief an outline of the methods, experiences, and results.
Each lesson costs from two to four cents, and the pupils--many of whom
have reached middle life--show a commendable zeal in prosecuting their
studies. However, two topics deserve mention--the lessons in mending and
in cooking. Since it is the poorer people who are to be benefited by
the work of Our House, lessons in economy are needed, if not demanded,
and the earlier opportunities for acquiring these lessons have been
meager. The authorities have therefore wisely decided to so instruct the
housewives of these people that their clothing may look well even if
mended and the family meals be palatable though simple. It is believed
that the result of such teaching will make many homes more attractive,
and keep the men from seeking outside of the house conditions which they
should find within.

The clubs also serve as valuable adjuncts to the work in hand. They are
usually groups of persons of the same sex and near the same age who
meet under the guidance of some experienced man or woman for social
intercourse, for practice in debate, playing of chess, the reading of
some standard author, or the discussion of places and peoples. In all
of these meetings, as well as under all circumstances, the people in
attendance are taught polite behavior by example rather than precept,
and every precaution is taken to avoid any reflection or invidious
comparisons that might tend to keep away the people whom Our House is
intended to benefit.

A word might be said about the travel club. Early in each autumn a
proposition is made that during the following summer a trip will be
taken to such and such places, usually naming one near by, within the
kingdom, and another farther away, as Brussels or the upper Rhine.
Persons desiring to visit either of the places named unite in forming
a club. They meet at stated times to listen to accounts of the place
selected, its historical associations, and the points of interest _en
route_, and also to pay into the treasury an amount agreed upon. For
example, last summer one club, upon the saving of a cent a week by each
member, was able to go to Haarlem and spend the day in seeing the city
and the many places of interest in the neighborhood. In another, each
member contributed ten cents a week, and the club was able to make a two
days' trip to Brussels. By this simple means persons otherwise unable to
go beyond the confines of their native city have the opportunity to get
at least a glimpse of the outside world, and under such conditions and
with such special preparations as to obtain from the trip the maximum
interest and profit.

The only thing that is free in Our House is legal advice and the writing
of legal documents. In Amsterdam, as elsewhere, the poorer people have
too frequently an exaggerated idea as to their rights, and rush into
"law" for fatuous protection. Such persons are liable to fall into the
hands of unprincipled lawyers who help to nurse the fancied wrong and
encourage a suit for damages, or put up an idle defense for the sole
purpose of winning a fee. To protect this class by giving them the most
unselfish advice possible, a number of the best lawyers of the city
have cheerfully offered their services, and every Thursday evening from
eight to twelve o'clock one or two stand ready to give gratuitously the
best advice they can upon such legal points as may be presented. That
this service is appreciated may be seen in the fact that from ten to
twenty persons profit by this privilege every evening. On this evening
persons are present for the purpose of writing letters for those unable
to write, and also to draw up legal documents for such as need them.

Mr. Adma van Scheltema--a name closely identified with every good work
in Amsterdam--has organized in Our House art loan exhibits. For one half
of the days during which the exhibit is open there is no charge for
admission, while a slight fee is exacted on the other days. From these
exhibitions much pleasure as well as instruction has been derived, and,
located in a section which sends but few visitors to the art museums,
one can realize that they perform a good work, as missionaries in
cultivating the people's taste.

Such is, in short, an account of a practical charity--a charity, in
truth, not because something is furnished for nothing, but that so much
is given in return for so little. During the past year more than three
thousand persons were registered as enjoyers of the privileges offered.
Mr. Janssen gave the building and in one sense endowed the work; Mr.
Tours gives his time, wisdom, and energy in directing its affairs; they
both ask the wiser men and women of the city to give a few hours of each
month or year. They have not asked in vain, and the cheerful responses
give promise of the coming of the time when the only answer to the
question, "Am I my brother's keeper?" will be an energetic "Yes."




SKETCH OF FRANK WIGGLESWORTH CLARKE.


The great advance which chemical science has made in the United States
during the past thirty years has been brought about by the joint
operation of several factors, of which we may mention the formation and
the influence of chemical societies seeking to further its development,
the intelligent labors of individual investigators cultivating special
fields, and the systematic pursuit of experimental work with reference
to certain definite results. In this shaping of chemical research in
such a way as to make it most efficient, the work and influence of
Frank Wigglesworth Clarke have been prominent and important. His own
labors have been industriously and unselfishly pursued with an eye to
the advancement of the science, and their value has been generally
recognized. It seems as if he had taken to himself a hint thrown out in
one of his earlier scientific papers, and, giving up the transient glory
of brilliant experiments, had devoted himself to setting the science as
far forward as possible in single branches.

Professor CLARKE was born in Boston, March 14, 1847, and was graduated
from the Lawrence Scientific School of Harvard University in 1867.
Two years later, in 1869, he was appointed instructor in chemistry
in Cornell University, the first assistant ever appointed at that
institution. His next position was that of professor of chemistry
and physics in Howard University, Washington, in 1873 and 1874. In
the latter year he became professor of chemistry and physics in the
University of Cincinnati, in a position which he held till 1883, when he
became chief chemist to the United States Geological Survey and honorary
curator of minerals in the United States National Museum, where he still
remains.

Professor Clarke, having become a member of the American Association
for the Advancement of Science in 1869, assisted, in 1875-'76, in the
organization of its section on chemistry, a branch which had theretofore
been but little represented in the Proceedings of the association. Prof.
S. W. Johnson was elected chairman of the new section for the meeting
in 1876 at Detroit, and Professor Clarke was commissioned to make the
necessary efforts to insure a full attendance of chemists and others
interested in the applications of chemistry. In 1888 he presided over
the section; and he has ever been active in building it up, and in the
development of the American Chemical Society.

Professor Clarke has published about seventy-five scientific papers in
various journals, and many popular articles, especially in Appletons'
Journal and the Popular Science Monthly. His first scientific paper, A
New Process in Mineral Analysis, was published in the American Journal
of Science for March, 1869. Other important papers have related to
analytical methods, to the constitution of the tartrates of antimony,
and to topics on chemical mineralogy, including especially the
constitution of the silicates.

Many of his popular articles relate to educational affairs, and present
forcible arguments for a fuller recognition of science in the course of
instruction, and cogent demonstrations of the need of better teaching
of science and better qualified teachers. When occasion has arisen, he
has fearlessly exposed and denounced humbug in education. In a paper on
The Higher Education, published in the seventh volume of the Popular
Science Monthly, having defined the purpose of true education as being
"to develop the mind; to strengthen the thinking faculties in every
possible direction; to render the acquisition of new knowledge easier
and surer; to increase the student's resources; and to render him better
fitted for dealing with the useful affairs of the world," he sets forth
the advantages of science over the ancient and even the modern languages
for the accomplishment of it. Science, he reasons, furnishes as good
an instrument for cultivating the memory, and has the additional
advantage of strengthening the perceptive powers too, for in it the eye,
the ear, and all the instruments of the senses are trained to observe
facts accurately, as they are not trained to so great a degree in
language study. It again takes the lead in the cultivation of the pure
reason; for it gives grand laws and generalizations already deduced or
in process of deduction. "The discovery of these natural laws may be
counted among the greatest achievements of the human mind. To follow
out the processes by which they were discovered gives the mind its most
rigid training, and elevates the tone of thought in many other respects.
The intellect becomes self-reliant and yet conscious of its own weak
points." Also, in æsthetic development, scientific education is put
foremost. "The true student of Nature and her phenomena ever sees order
and symmetry coming out of chaos, and finds the rarest beauty hidden
where to the unaided eye naught but ugliness exists.... Can any student,
who looks upon the universe with vision thus unobscured, fail to find
in his studies the truest æsthetic culture?" But it had been alleged
that the scientific courses had been tried in many American colleges and
found less fruitful than the classical. In answer to this the author
considered the character of most American colleges, the qualifications
of many professed teachers and the methods of study, and showed that
these, as they actually were, were not competent for the conveyance of
genuine scientific instruction.

By the multiplication of competing colleges putting sectarian interests
in the foremost place, the means were divided up and frittered away,
which, concentrated in one institution, would hardly be enough to
enable it to do really effective work. "Each college acts as a drag
on all the others. Libraries, cabinets, and faculties are uselessly
duplicated. Naturally, one result of this state of affairs is a lowering
of educational standards.... Since, on account of this foolish division
of forces, most of these colleges are inadequately endowed, they are
compelled to work short-handed. One professor has frequently several
branches to teach.... In the majority of cases there is a chair of
Latin, a chair of Greek, and then--a chair of 'Natural Science.' Each
linguistic professor is to some degree a specialist; while the one who
teaches science is perforce compelled to be a smatterer. He is expected
to teach half a dozen dissimilar branches, each one being a life work by
itself. He is to be omniscient on about a thousand dollars a year."

That the character of these institutions, as well as their poverty, was
detrimental to the advancement of scientific education was more fully
shown in another article on American Colleges _vs._ American Science,
in the ninth volume of the Monthly. The colleges were described as
being to a large extent denominational institutions, "equipped and
endowed with, due reference to the perpetuation of sound faith, and
incidentally to the encouragement of what is supposed to be learning....
The very fact that a college has been established for theological
purposes, or for ecclesiastical aggrandizement, is adverse to good
scientific research.... Every year professors are chosen, not on account
of scientific ability, but for reasons of a theological or sectarian
character. If two men, one a Baptist and the other a Unitarian, were
candidates for the same professorship in a Baptist university, the
former, even if very much inferior to his rival, would almost certainly
be elected.... Theological soundness in such an institution far outranks
scientific ability. If Laplace had lived in America, no college would
have tolerated him for an instant. Almost any decayed minister, seeking
an asylum, would have beaten him in the race for a professorship."

These conditions were shown to have necessarily a bad effect upon
American science, and to be not likely to arouse or encourage the
scientific spirit. The student "becomes accustomed to regard the
sciences as comparatively unimportant," and "graduates in complete
ignorance both of the methods and of the aims of science, having learned
only a few disconnected facts concerning the great world about him."

Improvement in these conditions, the author argued, must come partly
from within and partly from without. The colleges must reform their
ways, and, not being likely to do it spontaneously, must be helped--by
pressure of public sentiment and, later, of legislation. This suggestion
proved to be introductory to that of a very important line of work, for
the furtherance of which Professor Clarke seems never to have been able
to labor too earnestly and industriously.

"But how," he says, "should public sentiment be properly shaped and made
available for service? How is the natural, though slow, growth to be
fostered and directed? Mainly by the efforts, organized and individual,
of scientific men. Personally, every worker in science should strive
to awaken in the community about him a comprehension of the value
and purposes of his particular branch. In other words, the real
investigators ought to do more toward popularizing their discoveries
instead of leaving that task to amateurs or charlatans. At present,
unfortunately, too many able scientific men depreciate popular work and
hold aloof from it. They do nothing themselves to interest the public,
and then lament the fact that the public does not become interested.
Yet just here is where the beginning must be made. With a wider public
interest in science will come deeper public appreciation, and this will
develop the tendencies necessary for the improvement of our colleges
and schools. Until the people see and recognize the difference between
true investigators and mere collectors of specimens, between original
workers and text-book authors, little real progress will be made."

While these pictures were correct, when made, of a very large number of
American colleges, a vast improvement has taken place since the articles
were written in the quality of instruction given; but there yet remain
too many institutions to which they are still not inapplicable.

This was not the beginning of Professor Clarke's efforts to show men of
science that the true interests of their cause lay in their making their
knowledge easily accessible to the public. In the first volume of the
Monthly he had an article on Scientific Dabblers, the purpose of which,
as he defined it, was, after calling attention to the silly character
of much that was called "popular science," to urge upon true scientific
men the importance of rendering real knowledge more accessible to the
masses. There is a demand for science, he said, "or the trash which
is written would not be read. It works into nearly all departments
of common life, and is, in one way or another, of interest to almost
every one. Yet, as I have already said, the current popular lectures
upon scientific topics are frothy and worthless; the theologian often
misrepresents science for partisan purposes; and the newspapers, with
all the good they may do, are too frequently conducted by those ignorant
of all science. The people ask for knowledge, and unwittingly get much
chaff with their wheat.... Therefore it seems to be time that true
students of science should seek to popularize their learning.... Men of
science constantly lament that the Government does not extend more aid
to scientific research. The Government is a popular one, and the people
must be trained before its help can be expected. Therefore it is for the
interest of the teachers, as well as for the good of the people, that
scientific truths should be popularly put forward in simple, untechnical
language, and made accessible to all."

Later, in his chairman's address before the Chemical Subsection of
the American Association, in 1878, he had this subject in mind, and
mentioned it as part of the work of the section "to attract public
attention to the subjects that interest us, and to do what we can
to secure for chemistry a wider appreciation and greater means for
development.... If the general public," he said later in his address,
"is not interested in chemistry, it is because we as chemists have
neglected a part of our duty. We have but to speak, in order to command
the public ear."

Another side of scientific advancement to which Professor Clarke's
working life has proved him much attached is presented in this address
at the American Association meeting of 1878, and more minutely as to the
particular point we have in mind in an article on Laboratory Endowment,
in the tenth volume of the Popular Science Monthly. In the association
address he insisted strongly upon the physical side of chemical
research, stated briefly as the study of the phenomena which occur
during the reactions in chemical experiments, or of the transformations
of energy, and upon the importance of the co-ordination of studies
separately pursued to the systematic and permanent advancement of the
science; for which purpose he considered endowed laboratories for
research extremely desirable. In such laboratories adequate corps of
thorough specialists should co-operate in those investigations which
individuals could not undertake; every worker should be assigned to
definite, positive duties, the accurate and careful performance of which
would eventually be sure to advance exact knowledge. The work would be
hard routine, and the real value of the institution would be independent
of everything sensational, and would rest upon considerations of the
most severely practical kind. As an example of such work he mentioned
the study of the connection between the composition of a substance
and its physical properties. Supposing this taken up systematically
by a well-organized body of investigators, the first step would be to
determine, carefully and with the utmost rigor, the physical properties
of the elements. Each one of these substances would have to be isolated
in quantity and in a chemically pure condition, such as has never
been attained as to some--a labor which would of itself involve a
great amount of research. Then would come the measurement of physical
relations, thermal, electrical, optical, magnetic, mechanical, and so
on; and the determination of all their "constants" under widely varied
conditions, notably of pressure and temperature; labors which would
in many cases involve the comparative testing of various methods of
research, and often the invention of new experimental processes. The
number of elements and of their compounds which should be taken up in
some regular order, series by series, would afford almost illimitable
fields of research to large numbers of students; all of whom, if
laboring under some plan of systematic co-operation, might contribute
directly and efficiently to the perfection of the science. "One chemist
might undertake to furnish certain of the elements in a perfectly pure
condition; another might carefully determine under varying circumstances
their densities and rates of expansion; a third could work up their
latent and specific heats; a fourth their electrical relations, and so
on. Failure to attain grand results would be impossible. Doubtless
the labor would prove irksome and monotonous, but the reward would be
sure. In five years, more would be done toward rendering chemistry
an exact science than can be accomplished in a century by means of
chemical investigations at present most in vogue." Chemists engaging
in work of this kind would have to make sacrifices, for it would offer
little promise of sensational reputations to be gained through dazzling
discoveries, and would have to look to the ultimate glory of the science
for their chief reward.

Professor Clarke has not omitted to practice what he thus preached; and
while he has not failed to win honors in other fields of the science,
has made it the chief work of his scientific life to advance toward
solution one of the physical problems of chemistry indicated above.
He has taken as his special field of research the "constants," and
of these, the one which is perhaps the most fundamental of all, the
revision of the atomic weights--not by experiments of his own so much
as by comparison and criticism of the work of all who have undertaken
the task, eliminating errors and finding from the sum of the whole
what is the nearest deducible approach to accuracy. In 1872 he sent
to the Smithsonian Institution a compilation entitled A Table of
Specific Gravities, Boiling Points, and Melting Points for Solids and
Liquids. This was accepted by Prof. Joseph Henry, who made it the first
publication of a projected series to be called The Constants of Nature.
To this series Professor Clarke has since contributed Tables of Specific
Heats, of Expansions, and a Recalculation of the Atomic Weights. A new
edition of the Specific Gravities was issued in 1886, and a second
edition of the Atomic Weights in 1897. For the past five years Professor
Clarke has contributed an annual report on atomic-weight determinations
to the Journal of the American Chemical Society, giving each year a
consistent table of values brought thoroughly down to date. These tables
are now used in all parts of the world as standards for reference.

As chemist of the United States Geological Survey, Professor Clarke has
published ten official bulletins of work done in the laboratory under
his charge, of which Bulletin 125, The Constitution of the Silicates,
and Bulletin 148, Analyses of Rocks and Analytical Methods, by F. W.
Clarke and W. F. Hillebrand jointly, are the most important. Other works
are: Weights, Measures, and Money of All Nations, 1875; The Elements
of Chemistry, a school text-book, 1884; and a Report on the Teaching
of Chemistry and Physics in the United States, published by the United
States Bureau of Education in 1881.

A paper published by him in the Popular Science Monthly for January,
1873 (Volume II), on Evolution and the Spectroscope, showed that the
evolution of the planets from nebulæ was possibly accompanied by an
evolution of the chemical elements. This was nearly a year in advance of
Lockyer's first paper suggesting the same general view. The discussion
of this subject was taken up again in the eighth volume of the Monthly
(February, 1876), in an article, Are the Elements Elementary? in which
the author, after showing how subtle connections significant of unity
run through them all, inquired: "If the elements are all in essence one,
how could their many forms originate save by a process of evolution
upward? How could their numerous relations with each other, and their
regular serial arrangements into groups, be better explained? In this,
as in other problems, the hypothesis of evolution is the simplest,
most natural, and best in accordance with facts. Toward it all the
lines of argument presented in this article converge. Atomic weights,
specific volumes, and spectra, all unite in telling the same story,
that our many elements have been derived from simpler stock." These
views were admitted to be speculative but not baseless. "Science is
constantly reaching forward from the known to the unknown, partly by
careful experiment and partly by the prophetic vision of thought."
Then, speculation upon such questions "is not altogether unprofitable.
The time spent in conjectures and surmises is not wholly wasted, for
it is impossible to follow up any of the lines of thought thus opened
without reaching some valuable suggestions which may pave the way to
new discoveries. New truth, in one direction or another, is sure to be
reached in the long run. So, then, we may proceed to theorize in the
most barefaced manner without entirely quitting the legitimate domain
of science." An article on The Present Status of Mineralogy, in the
thirty-second volume of the Monthly, presents the mutual bearings of
that study and chemistry and geology.

Professor Clarke contributed the chapter Element to the last edition of
Watts's Dictionary of Chemistry. He was made president of the Washington
Chemical Society in 1885, and of the Philosophical Society of Washington
in 1896. He organized and had charge of Government exhibits, on behalf
of the Department of the Interior, at the expositions of Cincinnati,
Chicago, Atlanta, Nashville, and Omaha. He is a corresponding member of
the British Association, of the Edinburgh Geological Society, and of the
New York Academy of Sciences.




Correspondence.

THE MOON AND THE WEATHER.


_Editor Popular Science Monthly_:

DEAR SIR: Scientific investigators in meteorology have again and
again declared they have not been able to discover by accurate and
long-continued observation that the moon has any effect whatever upon
terrestrial weather; yet the farmers have, for unreckoned years,
undoubtingly ascribed certain kinds of weather--changes, especially--to
the moon; and, despite the dictum of the scientists, they have persisted
in their confidence in the pale orb as a weather-breeder, and as a
disposer, in a large degree, of the wet and dry features of the months.

Now comes Mr. H. H. Clayton, meteorologist at the Blue Hill
Meteorological Observatory, and shows by diagram and dates that the
_electrical_ condition of the atmosphere varies in close accord with the
position of the moon in her orbit.

That electricity performs various offices in the atmosphere, notably
among the particles of vapor, is well known; but just how and to what
extent atmospheric phenomena result from electrical action has not yet
been clearly demonstrated. However, we have now a scientific basis for
the assumption that the moon has an influence on the weather.

An interesting summary of present knowledge concerning the atmosphere
is contained in Studies of the Upper Atmosphere, by A. Lawrence
Rotch, director of the Blue Hill institution. The diagram of
comparative altitudes, which forms the last illustration of my article
on kite-flying, in the May number of this magazine, is from the
frontispiece of Mr. Rotch's pamphlet just mentioned, for which credit
was inadvertently omitted.
                                                GEORGE J. VARNEY.
  57 CORNHILL, BOSTON, _August 19, 1898_.




Editor's Table


_THE GOAL IN EDUCATION._

Many of our readers, we are sure, must have been impressed by the
articles on The Philosophy of Manual Training lately contributed
by Professor Henderson to the pages of this magazine. The thought
underlying them is one to which we have ourselves often endeavored
to give expression, namely, that the end of education is wholly
misconceived unless we consider it as aiming to bring the individual
into right relations, at as many points as possible, with the world in
which he lives, and to place him in as full possession as possible of
the varied powers and capacities of his nature. It is because he regards
manual training as the most effective instrument for awakening the
intellect in the first place, and then for establishing a proper balance
between the mental and bodily activities, that Professor Henderson has
advocated it with so much earnestness. All that he has said on the
subject seems to us deserving of the closest attention.

In the old system of education language was regarded as the supreme
and sufficient instrument of mental development; and in the great
public schools of England this idea enjoyed the very highest degree of
prestige and authority. By language in these establishments, the two
classical languages of Greek and Latin were meant, the English language
receiving very scant attention, and English literature none. If any
one was so far in advance of the times as to express a doubt whether a
knowledge of Greek and Latin was the only preparation needed for life,
he was pointed to the brilliant men who had come from the forms and the
playgrounds of Eton and Winchester and Harrow; and the discussion was
considered closed. The fact is that the radical insufficiency of the
system was masked to a great extent by the circumstance that it was
mainly applied to a ruling class, who early in life obtained a more
practical training in public affairs. Pitt was educated, as has been
remarked, by that great statesman, his father, the Earl of Chatham,
and Peel by a great manufacturer who took a keen interest in politics.
Robert Walpole, leaving the university at an early age, had the society
of his father, a most practical-minded country squire, whose original
ambition had been to make him the greatest grazier in the kingdom. Many
similar cases could be cited in which early introduction to society and
to practical life made up for the deficiencies of scholastic training,
and reflected, or seemed to reflect, on that training a much greater
credit than it deserved.

It may be admitted, however, that as a preparation for a political or
forensic career an old-fashioned classical education was not wholly
without efficacy. It was systematic and orderly; it was rigid in its
requirements; it presented difficulties which had to be overcome, and
afforded the means for unmasking looseness and inaccuracy of thought;
finally, it called into constant activity, though in a narrow field,
the discriminative, and analytical faculties. Its weakness lay in this,
that it did not reveal the nature of things, but promoted a dangerous
habit of "moving about in worlds not realized," and of giving to words
an importance which should only be conceded to verified and comprehended
facts.

Nowadays we mix, or try to mix, a modicum of scientific knowledge with
the education we impart. This is so far good. It affords a training
in observation and verification, and opens up to the young sources of
interest of which they may increasingly avail themselves in later years.
Moreover, as the scientific instruction generally embraces more or less
of physiology and hygiene, it places them on their guard against the
formation of injurious habits, and shows them the conditions on which
health depends. These are advantages which, so far as they go, it is
impossible to appreciate too highly.

It takes more, however, than the admixture of a little physical science
in a school curriculum to make, in a wide sense, the education that
is required for life. What is further required is a proper adjustment
of the mind toward life with its varied activities and its infinite
possibilities of good and evil. When we see men of fine literary
gifts growing more cynical as they advance in years, and treating the
world to stronger and stronger doses of pessimism in their writings,
we are compelled to believe that their adjustment to life must have
been wrong. When we see men of science who year by year appear to have
less and less in common with their fellow-creatures, and whose studies
only develop on the intellectual side an ever-increasing passion for
the infinitely minute and the vastly unimportant, and, on the moral,
a morbid sensitiveness to all kinds of personal questions, we find it
difficult to think that they were properly oriented at the start. It may
not be given to every one to "see life steadily and see it whole"; but
it ought to be possible for a well-trained mind to see it with an eye of
calm, tolerant, and sympathetic contemplation. No education is complete
which leaves out such knowledge of the world, and of the relation which
the individual sustains to it, as shall at least tend to give a right
purpose and direction to the individual life. "The world is very evil,"
is a pious utterance; but it is equally pious for each of us to ask
how much of evil is lurking in ourselves. We conceive of a scientific
education in the full sense as one which, while it imparts true ideas in
regard to the physical history of the globe and the chemical elements
that compose it, aims no less at unfolding the true constitution of
society, the springs of human action, the strength and weakness of human
character, the possibilities of good and evil that reside in every
individual, the misery that waits on wrongdoing, and the happiness that
flows from just and pure deeds. There is a way, we are persuaded, of
presenting the world of humanity to the minds of the young which would
tend to create in most--in the vast majority--a strong desire to take
a helpful part in the work of their age and generation, and not to
concentrate all their efforts on the business of self-advancement. It is
merely a question of seeing the facts in a broadly human, which is after
all the only true, light.

Let us have in education literature and analytical studies and science
with its grand constructions and sanifying discipline--all the useful
elements--but let the true goal of education be kept ever in view, which
is, not to enable this individual or that to shoot to a pre-eminence
over his fellows, but to place the individual in right relations with
his fellows, to give to each a career of useful activity, and to prevent
that dreary disappointment with life and all its works which overtakes
so many in their declining years. Life has its burdens, but it is not
vanity; and the normal action of human beings on one another should be
to give to each separate existence a higher value and deeper sources of
happiness.


_A DOUBTFUL APPENDIX TO SCIENCE._

It was perhaps to be expected that Sir William Crookes, as president
of the British Association, would, whatever else he touched upon in
his presidential address, say something in regard to the special views
which have now for many years been associated with his name. In point of
fact he did do so. Beginning with a survey of the world's resources in
the matter of wheat production, and an inquiry as to how the fertility
of the soil may in future be kept up, he passed to the constitution of
matter and molecular action as illustrated by the phenomena of Röntgen
rays, and finally referred to "experiments tending to show that, outside
our scientific knowledge, there exists a force exercised by intelligence
differing from the ordinary intelligence common to mortals." These
experiments were made, we are told, more than thirty years ago. It does
not appear that any substantial or indubitable addition has been made
to the evidence which these experiments afforded, or were supposed to
afford; but Professor Crookes "thinks" he can "see a little further
now." "I have glimpses," he says, "of something like coherence among the
strange, elusive phenomena." That undoubtedly is a good thing to get
glimpses of; but there is perhaps room for question whether the extreme
interest of the professor in the "strange elusive phenomena" has not
led him to make a little more of the "glimpses" than strict scientific
method would warrant.

It is really only necessary to read the concluding portion of Professor
Crookes's address to see that he is dealing not with science but with
crude imaginations. He says that "confirmation of telepathic phenomena
is afforded by many converging experiments," but especially by "the
subconscious workings of the mind when these are brought into conscious
survey." There is really no meaning in this. How can any "survey" be
other than conscious? And what is there in the subconscious workings
of the mind adapted to prove that impressions can be made upon the
mind otherwise than through the recognized channels of sense? "The
patient experimentation of the Society for Psychical Research is probing
subliminal processes and learning lessons of alternating personalities
and abnormal states." There is no objection in the world to all that;
but it would take more than an alternating personality or an abnormal
state to enable a mind to gather knowledge from another mind without
the intermediation of intelligible signs. A sick man may act in a very
singular way, but his sickness does not enable him to transcend the
ordinary powers of humanity.

The eminent professor speaks of the cures wrought by suggestion
(hypnotism); but seeing that the suggestions are made by intelligible
signs, verbal or other, we find no support here for the telepathic
hypothesis. We really gather from the professor's remarks that while a
great many persons--some of high intelligence and of recognized position
in the scientific or philosophical world--have been pottering away at
this matter of telepathy and other phases of spiritualism for a great
many years, things are to all intents and purposes just as they were
before all these laborious researches began. This is not just the way
the professor puts it; his words are: "A formidable range of phenomena
must be scientifically sifted before we effectually grasp a faculty
so strange, so bewildering, and for ages so inscrutable as the direct
action of mind on mind." Sometimes the reason why a thing is inscrutable
is because it isn't so; and that, we suspect, is the explanation in
the present case. One hypothesis which the professor puts forward is
simple to the last degree. It is that the molecular action of the
brain, when thoughts are passing through it, is taken up by the ether
and communicated to another brain in which it awakens similar thoughts.
But the question we ask at once is why this wireless telegraphy between
brain and brain is not going on all the time, and why we are all not
driven crazy by the everlasting intrusion of other people's thoughts?
If this is the process, why should neighboring brains be skipped, and
the effect be produced upon one particular brain hundreds, perhaps
thousands, of miles away?

"It is henceforth open to science," says Sir William Crookes, "to
transcend all we now think we know of matter, and to gain glimpses of
a profounder scheme of cosmic law." We really do not know when it was
_not_ open to science to do this _if it could_; and we do not see that
the telepathists and other denominations of spiritualists have in any
appreciable manner improved the situation as regards the probability
of the thing being done. They have contributed floods of talk and tons
upon tons of printed matter, and have worked thousands of people into
variously grewsome conditions of mind; but if any one can point to a
single distinct advance in scientific theory due to their peculiar
methods, we can only say that we do not know what it is. Professor
Crookes has been one of the foremost scientific workers of his day; and
we find it hard to believe that he can be under any illusion as to the
futility of the efforts of the spiritualist school. At the same time
he is entitled to the utmost freedom of thought and utterance; and if
he believes there is still hope of important gains to humanity from the
side of spiritualism, he is justified in holding his position; and while
we may think he is sadly misled, we must accord him the respect due to
eminent talents and unquestioned sincerity.


_THE CAUSE OF SPAIN'S DECADENCE._

Until account is taken of the effect of war on the thoughts, feelings,
and institutions of men, no headway can be made toward a rational
explanation of the decadence of Spain. Since the outbreak of hostilities
with that country, which has made the topic a favorite one with
newspaper and magazine writers, every other explanation has been
vouchsafed; but all of them, including the favorite one about the mental
and industrial paralysis produced by the Spanish Inquisition, mistake
effects for causes. Not one of them, so far as we have seen, has touched
the root of the matter and pointed out that Spain has simply gone the
way of every other nation that has devoted itself, not to the pursuits
of peace, but to the destruction of life and property.

Like all other despotisms, Spanish despotism has been the inevitable
product of the necessities of war. Success in that pursuit requires
that the subjects of a monarch shall place unreservedly their lives and
property at his disposal. He must be permitted to levy conscriptions
without let or hindrance, and to impose taxes with the same freedom. The
longer and more intense the militant activities, the more unmitigated
the despotism. In Spain the conditions for the uninterrupted growth of
such irresponsible power have been especially favorable. There were
first the long wars with the Moors, then the Italian wars, the wars of
the Reformation, the wars of the Spanish Succession, the Napoleonic
wars, followed by a period of chronic revolution, and the wars carried
on against the natives and other adversaries in the New World. The
impulse toward a concentration of power in the hands of one man
engendered by these incessant conflicts could not fail to blot out of
existence every sentiment and institution of freedom. Only during the
past twenty-five years of peace has either been able to gain a foothold
and to give a promise of regeneration.

But the despotism growing out of war means more than the bare statement
that all power over life and property has been placed in the hands of
a monarch. It means that his subjects have been deprived of the right
to think and act for themselves. He has taken charge of both their
consciences and their conduct. In Spain, for some reason not easy to
discover, the ecclesiastical despotism that accompanies the growth of
political despotism became more potent and deadly than in the other
countries of Europe. There the priests were more powerful sometimes than
the monarch himself. With the institution of the Inquisition during the
reign of Ferdinand and Isabella they wrought a havoc to the Spanish
intellect that has no parallel outside of the great Oriental despotisms.
To them is due the mental torpor of the Spaniards, who, according to U.
J. Burke, wrapped themselves in a cloak and "sought safety in dignified
silence." How could the spectacle of an _auto-da-fé_ do otherwise than
disincline a prudent man to think for himself and to tell what he
thought?

That devotion to military pursuits inspires a contempt for industrial
pursuits and gives birth to a feeling of superiority over the people
engaged in them we see to-day in France and Germany. In those countries
it has come to such a pass that civilians are regarded as almost without
rights, since an officer imagining himself insulted may run them through
with his sword, and as having no other function in the economy of the
world but to work for their masters. In Spain during the years of her
greatest military activity these feelings of a barbarian reached an
intensity that can not now be realized. The only occupation outside
of killing and plundering enemies either in Europe or America that a
gentleman could follow was a career as a churchman or as an official
in the home or colonial administration. "Public offices," says Henry
C. Lea, describing the results of this absurd belief, "were multiplied
recklessly, and the steady increase in the ranks of the clergy, regular
and secular, was a constant subject of remonstrance. In 1626 Navarette
tells us that there were thirty-two universities and more than four
thousand grammar schools crowded with sons of artisans and peasants
striving to fit themselves for public office or holy orders. Most of
them failed in this through inaptitude, and drifted into the swarms
of tramps and beggars who were a standing curse to the community."
Hence the abnormal proportions of the ecclesiastical and bureaucratic
establishments; hence also the almost total failure to develop the great
natural resources of the country; hence, finally, the unprosperous
condition of the industries, not crushed out of existence by the
regulations of the official parasites.

To many people the callousness of Spaniards to suffering and their
disregard of the rights of others have seemed the greatest mystery. Why
is it that they still cling so tenaciously to the pleasures of the bull
ring? Why was it that they appeared so indifferent to the miseries of
the Cuban reconcentrados? In the light of the influence of war on the
sympathies these questions present no difficulty. Clear also does it
become why the Spaniards possess as little patriotism as the Chinese.
Training for centuries in the belief that the most honorable occupation
is the killing and plundering of enemies or the filling of positions
in church and state that obviate the necessity of earning a livelihood
by honest toil is not fitted to inspire a keen sense of justice or a
lively fellow-feeling. When people have been plundered for centuries by
a greedy bureaucratic despotism they can not persuade themselves that
it is their duty to protect their oppressors from foreign or domestic
assailants. What they are most interested in is an opportunity to get a
living. Whether the honor of their country is at stake, or whether there
is threatened the loss of the last remnant of a colonial empire that has
cost them blood and treasure beyond estimate, they are certain to be as
indifferent as the victims of a slave driver to the misfortunes that
have overtaken him.

Some friends of Spain have been inclined to regard the loss of these
colonies as the culmination of her misfortunes. We can not but regard
it as the beginning of better days. Although Spain has not been engaged
in war on an extensive scale for a long time, her efforts to retain
the control of a people anxious to be delivered from her incapacity
and despotism have tended to keep alive the barbarous feelings and
traditions of the past. The Cubans and Porto Ricans were not governed
for their own benefit like the colonists of Great Britain, but for
the benefit of rapacious politicians and traders and manufacturers in
Spain. In the colonial administration the former sought easy employment
and speedy fortune. In the colonial commercial regulations the latter
found an artificial support for trade and manufactures that could not
have survived without them. By discriminations, Spanish millers, for
instance, were able to import wheat, turn it into flour, and sell it
to the colonists at a price scandalously in excess of that charged
for the American product. Sometimes the trouble to grind the wheat
was not taken. After it had been imported into Spain it was shipped
to the colonies, and upon them was thrown the expense of needless
transportation and the profits of superfluous middlemen.

With the complete extinction of the colonial empire of Spain will come
to an end these opportunities for the pillage of industrious peoples.
The parasites, commercial and bureaucratic, that have depended upon
them for a livelihood will be obliged to turn their attention to more
legitimate employment. There will be brought to an end also the immense
sacrifice of life and treasure required to suppress the ever-recurring
insurrections. Both will be left in Spain to develop her resources
and to add to her wealth and prosperity; but, best of all, will cease
the encouragement to the militant and bureaucratic spirit that the
possession of the colonies fostered. The sentiments as well as the
employments appropriate to peace will receive an impulse that ought to
enable Spain to fill an honorable if not a glorious place in the future
history of Europe. But this bright outlook is based upon the assumption
that she will not join in the mad competition of her neighbors in
armaments and thus fall a prey with them to the economic and moral
ravages of "an armed peace."


_DREAM AND REALITY._

An ingenious article by M. Camille Mélinand, which appeared a few
months ago in the _Revue des Deux Mondes_ under the title of Le Rêve et
la Réalité (Dream and Reality), is reproduced, in its more important
points, in translation, in the present number of the Monthly, and will
repay perusal for the novel views it presents. The object of the writer
is to show that there is not so much difference as is commonly supposed
between the waking and sleeping states, that our dreams are not so
illusory nor our waking experiences so absolutely real as we are in the
habit of assuming, and that, as we wake from dreams, so we may expect
to wake from what we call life into a condition of existence that will
give us a new standpoint, and reduce all the experiences which we now
take so seriously and tragically to the level of a dream. The only
substantial differences he recognizes between our waking state and the
dream state are (1) that in our waking moments we know that there is
another condition which we call dreaming, while in our dreams we do not
recognize a separate waking state; and (2) that, while we wake from our
dreams, we do not wake from what we call reality.

M. Mélinand writes in a candid spirit, and yet we think his article is
calculated to encourage a somewhat unhealthy type of mysticism. We do
not see how it is possible to take too serious a view of the life we
live in the present. Whether we view it tragically or not must depend in
large measure upon our individual experiences; and happy are they into
whose lives tragedy does not enter. The very fact that M. Mélinand would
dissuade us from taking life tragically shows that he recognizes that
life--our waking life--can be brought under the rule of right reason.
He does not advise us not to take our dreams tragically, for he knows
that the dream state is one not susceptible of rational regulation, and
this, we think, might very properly be accounted a third very important
difference between dream and reality. The true advice to give to those
whose happiness we have at heart is, not to look upon life as a kind
of dream, but to take it seriously, to study its laws, and to accept
the burdens and duties it imposes. It may be remarked that dreams give
very little trouble, as a rule, to those whose waking hours are well
spent, and whose minds and bodies are kept in a condition of healthful
balance. We can indeed in the waking state take measures to reduce our
dreams to a minimum, and to provide that at least they shall not be of
a distressing character. Such being the case, it seems idle, to say
the least, to speculate, as many besides M. Mélinand have done, on the
possible reality of dreams. What Bottom said of his dream, "Man is but
an ass if he go about to expound this dream," might be applied without
much risk of error to dreams generally; unless the exposition takes the
direction of endeavoring to explain what antecedent mental or physical
condition, or what circumstances acting upon the sleeper, may have given
rise to the dream in a given case.

M. Mélinand makes a remark which the experience of many will confirm,
that dreams sometimes throw a light of extraordinary intensity on
characters and situations, giving us, perhaps, truer views of certain
things than we had ever attained in our waking hours. This, however,
would only imply the withdrawal at such moments of influences or
conditions which, in our waking life, may have the effect of rendering
insight less keen and uncompromising. If, for example, we could in
our dreams revert to the standpoint of childhood, we should see many
things with a directness which is more or less lacking to our mature
cogitations, and pronounce judgments in a correspondingly down-right
manner, with perhaps a closer approximation to absolute truth. This,
however, would manifestly not imply any extension of our mental
range, nor afford any guarantee of the "reality" of the dream life.
The intuitions of the novelist or dramatist, when they are true and
profound, give a wonderful air of reality to the scenes which the author
portrays, but do not make them real. There are various waking states in
which our perceptions are more than normally acute; and, as we know,
the loss of one physical organ leads frequently to an increase of power
in others; but these facts throw little light on the main problem of
life, which is how to develop and use our normal powers to the best
purpose and with the best results. At the same time it is well not to
despise any knowledge that may come to us from dreams in the way of
self-revelation or otherwise, but to use it for the strengthening of
what is weak and the rectifying of what is wrong. In that way dreams may
be made subsidiary to the better government of our higher waking life.

As to the conclusion the writer draws, that, as we wake from dreams, so
we may some day wake from this life, which is so like a dream, we leave
it to the judgment of our readers, merely remarking that it would be
very unfortunate if the thought of such an awakening should lead any one
to think little of this life, or abate any effort which he can make to
render it, if a dream, a happy dream to himself and others.




Scientific Literature.

SPECIAL BOOKS.


The period since the Congress of Vienna has been immensely fruitful
of great and far-reaching events--of events that have essentially
modified the fortunes of the world, its theories of government, and the
condition of its peoples; and of that period the nearly fifty years
covered by the second volume of Professor Andrews's history[13] have
been most eventful and marked by momentous changes. At the opening
of this history the continental sovereigns had established despotism
throughout their domains on what they thought were firm foundations,
and surrounded it with guards which they considered unassailable. The
close of it finds the conditions reversed; government in the interests
of the people recognized, and yielded to, even if grudgingly, by
those backward monarchs who would prefer to contend against it. The
first volume of Professor Andrews's history brings the story down to
the close of the revolutionary movements of 1848, when the princes,
again set upon their thrones, were studying and plotting as to how
they might resume their old authority. In France, Louis Napoleon
had become a central figure, and the tendencies were taking shape
under which the republic was destroyed and imperialism established.
Taking up the record again at this point, Mr. Andrews tells us he has
treated only those phases of the history that concern the development
of Europe in the larger sense, rather than that of each particular
state or country. On the ground that no event can be understood in
isolation, and that history is something more than a series of events
chronologically considered, he has endeavored to give logical form to
the treatment of the subject, to carry each movement forward to its
conclusion before turning to the others; and has introduced nothing
that did not seem to him to be absolutely essential to an understanding
of the subject. He has not deemed it necessary to describe battles and
military movements at length, and has omitted, with a few exceptions,
biographical discussions. He has been successful in adhering to his
plan, and, writing always dispassionately, yet without sacrificing
interest, and with his mind fixed on the main object, has given a clear
and complete view of what each event recorded signified and of what
Europe has accomplished in the past half century. The first chapter
concerns France, the failure of the second republic, and the rise
of Napoleon III to imperial power. This was extremely unwelcome to
the other sovereigns, who were disposed to resent the entrance of an
intruder into their ranks, and led to diplomatic skirmishing, ending
in the Crimean War--a war that "did not create the forces that led to
the national unity of Italy and Germany, ... but gave to Cavour and
Bismarck the opportunity that each was seeking." It requires but a few
uncolored words at the beginning of the story of the achievement of the
unity of Italy--the mightiest event of the whole series--to picture
Victor Emanuel the hero that he was. With similar success are presented
the masterly statesmanship of D'Azeglio and Cavour and the high-souled
patriotism of the people of Italy. This achievement, a victory over
opposing Europe, compelled the recognition of an international principle
based on the affinities of peoples, and inaugurated, "not only a new
_régime_ for Italy, but also a new public law for Europe." The empire of
Napoleon, which rose to its culmination while these things were going
on, was "nothing but an adventure out of accord with modern highly
developed civilization," exhausted France and checked the education of
the people in matters of government and habits of self-reliance. The
rise of Prussia and the establishment, under Bismarck, of the unity of
Germany, are regarded as an instance of the accomplishment of a noble
end by the use of force. The struggle culminated in the war of 1870,
the ultimate consequence of which was that "scarcely a vestige remained
of those conditions of the Congress of Vienna which for so many years
had been the anxious care of the European concert." The arrangement
between Austria and Hungary, creating a dual monarchy, "established a
government which was the result, not merely of political ingenuity, but
of experience, and one that on the whole was successful"; and Austria
has taken its place among the enlightened governments of Europe. The
"Eastern question" is presented as one in which the attitude of the
powers is no longer determined in Europe, but in China, India, and
Africa, the settlement of which seems to be indefinitely postponed. The
concluding chapters relate to present conditions.

       *       *       *       *       *

Mr. _Seward_ excuses himself in rather an apologetic way for undertaking
to write a book on _Fossil Plants_[14] for the Cambridge Natural
Science Manuals--a task which Professor Williamson, a founder of
modern palæobotany, had considered too serious; but students of botany
and geology have cause to thank him for having consented to attempt
the writing of a book intended to render more accessible some of the
important facts of the science, and to suggest lines of investigation in
it. The botanist and geologist, not being always acquainted with each
other's subjects in a sufficient degree to appreciate the significance
of palæobotany in its several points of contact with geology and recent
botany, the subject does not readily lend itself to adequate treatment
in a work intended for students of both classes, and the author has
accordingly tried to shape his treatment with this point in view, and
so as to adapt it to both non-geological and non-botanical students.
As a possible aid to those undertaking research in this field he has
given more references than usually seem appropriate in an introductory
treatise--often to specimens of coal-measure plants in the Williamson
cabinet of microscopic sections, now in the British Museum--and has
dealt with certain questions in greater detail than an elementary
treatment of the subject requires. His plan has been to treat certain
selected types with some detail, and to refer briefly to such others
as should be studied by any one desiring to pursue the subject more
thoroughly, rather than to cover a wide range or to attempt to make the
list of types complete. The book opens with a sketch of the history
of palæobotany, which is followed by a discussion of the relation of
palæobotany to botany and geology. A succinct review of geological
history is then given, in which the several principal formations are
briefly described. The theory of the process of the preservation of
plants as fossils is explained, the difficulties and sources of error
in the determination of fossil plants are pointed out, and the rules
for nomenclature and of priority in it are explained. The systematic
part follows these introductory chapters, giving as full descriptions
as the condition of the fossils admit, with illustrations--one hundred
and eleven in all--of those belonging to the orders _Thallophyta_,
_Bryophyta_, and _Pterodophyta_, carrying the subject as far as the
_Sphenophyllales_. Technical as the subject necessarily is, the
treatment is clear and, where the matter admits, fluent, so that no
student need complain of difficulties in that line.

FOOTNOTES:

[13] The Historical Development of Modern Europe from the Congress of
Vienna to the Present Time. By Charles M. Andrews. Vol. II, 1850-1897.
New York: G. P. Putnam's Sons. Pp. 467. Price, $2.50.

[14] Fossil Plants. For Students of Botany and Geology. By A. C. Seward.
With Illustrations. Cambridge, England: The University Press. New York:
The Macmillan Company. Pp. 452. Pries, $3.


GENERAL NOTICES.

DR. _W. Detmer's Practical Plant Physiology_[15] is a book of experiments
for the use of teachers as well as of students in higher-grade schools,
and supplies an aid to the study of the whole of that branch of the
science by experimental processes. While the arrangement of the material
in the second German edition is essentially the same as in the first,
nearly every section has been enlarged or remodeled, and the book is
essentially a new one; new experiments have been included for lecture
demonstration or private work, and pains have been taken to render
the book increasingly useful to serious students of plant physiology,
especially to those who desire to familiarize themselves with methods
of research. Great care has been taken in the selection of research
material recommended for the experiments; and material suitable for
winter work has received attention as well as summer material. This
second German edition is presented by the publishers in the translation
in its entirety, without addition or alteration. The two great divisions
of the book are into the Physiology of Nutrition and the Physiology of
Growth and Movements resulting from Irritability. In the first division
the experiments bear upon the food of plants (assimilation, production
of proteids, constituents of the ash, and organic compounds as food
for plants); the molecular forces and processes (including movements
of gases, absorption and movements of water, and absorption of mineral
substances in plants); and metabolic processes in the plant. In the
second division the characteristics of growing plant structures, the
conditions necessary for growth, the influence of internal causes and
external conditions; geotropic, heliotropic, and hydrotropic mutations,
and other phenomena of irritability; the winding of tendrils and twining
plants; dorsicentrality, polarity, and anisotropy and phenomena of
correlation; and movements of variation, are presented.

       *       *       *       *       *

The primary objects of Mr. _Hoffman's The Sphere of Science_[16] are to
point out what constitutes a science, and set forth the ground upon
which every science rests and the principles and rules that must be
followed in order to construct one. The author maintains throughout
that every department of knowledge is capable of scientific treatment,
and must be so treated before any great advance can be made toward a
consistent and rational conception of the universe. The subjects are
considered in succession of the true conception and aims of science,
what it takes for granted, the scientific method, certainty and
probability in science, the use of the imagination, analogy as an aid,
the limitations of science, recent advances in the physical sciences,
the old and new psychology, modern scientific ethics, philosophy as the
science of the sciences, and the harmony of the sciences. The author
holds that the chief need in all departments of thought is not so much
mere facts as a new arrangement and classification of facts already at
hand; that we can be certain of no doctrine, but the most we can do to
establish it is to show that the balance of probabilities is in favor of
it; that philosophy is the life of science and science the vital breath
of philosophy, and if one is severed from the other both pine away and
die; and that those scientific researches are successful which are not
exclusively special, but are illuminated by an ample idea of science.
The book is the outcome of a series of lectures given to classes in
Union College to supplement their work in formal logic.

       *       *       *       *       *

The _Text-Book of Geodetic Astronomy_[17] was prepared by Mr. _John F.
Hayford_ to meet the conditions of the course at Cornell University, the
terms of which the standard works now in use could not be made to fit.
The purpose of the book is to furnish a text short and easy enough to be
mastered by the student of civil engineering in a single college term
which shall give him a sufficiently exact and extensive knowledge of
geodetic astronomy to serve as a basis for practice in that line after
graduation. While it is primarily a manual for students, the author
has endeavored to insert such matter, tables, and convenient formulas
as would make it of value also to the engineer making astronomical
observations. Mathematical processes have been omitted, except those
that are actually necessary for developing the working formulas, and
simple and special means for deriving the formulas have been chosen in
every case admitting choice. Considerable attention has been devoted
to a discussion of the various sources of error in each kind of
observations. Those formulas have been selected, so far as possible,
that lead to accurate and rapid computation.

       *       *       *       *       *

_L'Année Psychologique_[18] of M. _Alfred Binet_ and his colaborers in
the Laboratory of Physiological Psychology of the Sorbonne, Paris, is
now in its fourth year, and the four volumes present a compendium of
the psychological studies and literature of the period they cover,
the value of which will be appreciated by any one who has occasion to
examine the work. The first volume was a book of 619 pages, with 33
figures; the second, of 1010 pages, 141 figures, and several plates; the
third, of 825 pages, 103 figures, and numerous plates; and the present
volume has 849 pages and 117 figures. The plan of all the volumes is
the same; it is to present in full the labors of the laboratory, with
original memoirs, and to give a condensed but adequate and classified
summary of the world's literature of the year relating to the subject.
The present volume contains twenty-seven original memoirs, mostly by
Professor Binet and M. N. Vaschide, with others by M. B. Bourdon and Mr.
A. Le Clère; about ninety reviews of books and papers, classified under
sixteen heads, according as they relate to the physiology of the nervous
system, the several senses, mental faculties and operations, movements,
individual psychology and character, sleep, dreams, and pathological
cases, and animal psychology; a bibliography, also classified, of 123
pages; and an index of authors, occupying 17 double-columned pages.

       *       *       *       *       *

_Prof. Cyrus Thomas_ has given, in his _Introduction to the Study of
North American Archæology_,[19] a brief summary of the progress in the
investigation and study of the subject which has been made up to the
present time. The increased activity among students, the numerous
explorations made, the accumulation of data and the flood of light
thrown on questions relating to prehistoric North America since the
publication of the last general work on it seemed to call for such a
summary. While the author's chief object is to present and arrange the
data so as to afford the student some means of bringing into harmony
and utilizing the facts and materials at hand, yet, in view of the
impossibility of presenting a full account of the archæological remains
of the continent, and discussing all the questions connected with them
in a single small volume, only those considered the best representatives
of the leading types and those which best illustrate the arts, customs,
and culture status of the former inhabitants are referred to. The
movements and remains are treated under the three heads of the Arctic,
Atlantic, and Pacific divisions; the first including the works of the
Eskimos, the second those of the mound builders, and the third the
curious variety of works scattered along the Pacific coast, and in
Mexico and Central America, rising to great elaboration in the latter
countries. Theories have to be considered, though they are all still
uncertain, and Professor Thomas notices the various views which have
been expressed as to the origin of the works and the people who executed
them. He himself believes that they are all the work of the peoples
who lived here when America was discovered, and are represented by the
present Indians; that they are not of a very extreme antiquity; and that
the continent was peopled by tribes who came down from the northwest
through the region between Hudson Bay and the Rocky Mountains.

       *       *       *       *       *

Of Nature books encouraging the study of the life around us we have
an abundance--of some sorts, perhaps, a superfluity--and they have
their uses, one of the chief of which is drawing people, who might
otherwise never think of it, to the observation of natural facts, and
to inquiry into their character and causes. Such books are fittingly
complemented by the _Handbook of Nature Study_,[20] of _D. Lange_, of St.
Paul, Minnesota, which teaches how system may be introduced into this
occupation. In it, the author has undertaken to point out some of the
material which may be made the basis of profitable lessons in Nature
study, and to show how this material may be made available, and what the
pupils may be taught about it. The author has arranged the matter of
the subject of his teachings according to seasons and life communities.
He begins at home in the spring, and directs the wanderings of the
pupils to the waters, fields, and prairies, the roadsides and neglected
corners, studying besides the plants and animals, the geological action
of water, the flowers of the fields and the needs of neglected places,
window flowers, and domestic animals. Then he goes to the woods--in
spring, in summer, and in autumn--and their plant and animal life, the
effect of all these upon the earth, and their relations to one another.
Some practical precepts are given to teachers concerning the method of
conducting the study of Nature.

In the presentation of his conception of _The State_[21] or the Elements
of Politics, Prof. _Woodrow Wilson_ has taken a comprehensive view.
Designing a book for study and instruction, he has sought to set forth
the evolution of existing systems of government from the beginning.
Possessing no model, no text-book of like scope and purpose having
apparently hitherto been attempted, he has had to make his own type;
and, in the absence of anything else to refer the student to, has been
obliged to include much that might otherwise have been omitted. The
volume is consequently large; but this disadvantage, if it be one, is
compensated for by the fact that the student has the whole subject
before him. For his descriptions the author has chosen governments
which are types of their several kinds. An indispensable prerequisite
to studies of things of this sort is a knowledge of the constitutions
of the states of classical antiquity; hence the institutions of Greece
and Rome are studied: Greece, which furnished the spirit and inspiration
under which the world has advanced; and Rome, which laid the foundations
of modern jurisprudence. Before these, even, a glance at The Earliest
Forms of Government, their Origin and Evolution, was required. Then,
coming to modern systems, which are also traced in their historical
development, "the government of France serves excellently as an example
of a unitary government of one kind, and Great Britain equally well as
an example of a unitary government of another kind; Germany exhibits a
federal empire, Switzerland a federal republic of one sort, the United
States a federal republic of another; Austria-Hungary and Sweden-Norway
show the only two existing European types of dual monarchies." Russia
might have been presented as having a place apart in European politics,
but the book was full. The work has been prepared in the belief that
"our own institutions can be understood and appreciated only by those
who know other systems of government as well and the main facts of
general institutional history." The accounts of the particular systems
of government are followed by short chapters on the Nature and Forms
of Government; Law, its Nature and Development; the functions and
the objects of government; and summaries, in which the conclusion is
expressed that law grows with the growth of the community, can not leap
too far ahead of it, and must not lag behind it; and that "the method
of political development is conservative adaptation, shaping old habits
into new ones, modifying old means to accomplish new ends."

       *       *       *       *       *

Mr. _H. E. Parkhurst_ has made in his _How to Name the Birds_[22] a
book on a different plan from the other books about birds that are
now appearing so abundantly--not to rival them, but to serve as an
introduction to their more general use. It is intended to aid the
field ornithologist in determining an unknown species, by calling his
attention to their more obvious features and those more distinguishable
from a distance than those which observers using the ordinary bird books
have to depend on as a means of recognition. Color is chiefly relied
upon, and, as a further means of finding the birds, they are grouped
by the seasons, when they may be seen in a given locality--the summer,
winter, migrant, and permanent birds, and birds of prey. The first four
groups are subgrouped according to color, and the larger color groups
are further subdivided. Other devices and signs are contrived, so that
a complete description of the bird, as it will appear to the amateur
watching it from a little way off, is given in three or four lines.
To this a brief comment is added regarding the nesting and habits of
the bird. These descriptions are preceded by an analytical key similar
to the botanical keys; and the study is aided by giving three pages
of diagrams illustrating the distinctive areas of the bird's body, to
which reference is made in describing the colors, stripes, and spots.
The list comprises only those birds that are normally found within the
territory described in the title as regular summer or winter visitants,
as migrants, or as permanent species.

       *       *       *       *       *

A very important contribution to the economy of city administration is
the quarterly _Supplement to Municipal Affairs_, June, 1898, in which
the late superintendent of street cleaning in the city of New York,
_George E. Waring_, Jr., presents his observations on street-cleaning
methods in European cities, and general reports of his own work in
that line. The observations in Europe, made in the summer of 1896, in
a special study of the subject, for the information and improvement
of Mr. Waring's own department, include accounts of the conditions as
to cleanliness and the methods of doing the work in Vienna, Budapest,
Munich, Berlin, Cologne, Brussels, London, Birmingham, Paris, Turin, and
Genoa. Mr. Waring finds that the regulations under which the streets are
really kept clean in those cities are no better than ours; "but there is
the immense difference that in Europe laws and ordinances mean something
and are executed, while here they are treated as mere matters of form."
The reports of Mr. Waring's own work in New York embrace a review of the
general operations of the department, the report of the snow inspector,
and an account of the highly successful plan for the adjustment of labor
questions instituted by Mr. Waring.

Mr. _Lauros G. McConachie_, in the study and development of legislative
methods which he publishes under the title of _Congressional Committees_
(T. Y. Crowell & Co., New York, $1.75), assumes that a complete
breakdown of parliamentary machinery took place on the floors of
Congress under the sudden and vast augmentation of legislative burdens
which our senators and representatives had to confront after the civil
war. Two schools of reformers came to the front, one of which held up
the British parliamentary system as a model and directed attention
abroad in the search for light; while the other stood up for the
defense of American legislative methods as developments of American
political conditions. The author has sought a mean between these
schools, and has tried to glean from contemporary debates, memoirs,
newspapers, and other records the reasons assigned for each innovation
as it has entered and enlarged the codes, and has taken the testimony of
contemporary legislators upon the conditions prevailing in successive
stages in the history of the national House and Senate. Among the
lessons presented by the book are those of the tremendous power wielded
by the speaker of the House of Representatives and of "other anomalies
in a supposed elective folk congress."

       *       *       *       *       *

_Whittaker's Mechanical Engineer's Pocket Book_, prepared by _Philip
R. Björling_, if it does not contain everything, contains a great many
facts and formulas concerning matters on which the mechanician is often
called upon to seek immediate information, a considerable proportion
of which are not easily subject to systematic classification. Among
the one hundred and thirty formulas and processes are those relating
to the flow and force of water and wind, the pressure of gases and
the air, the weight, proportions, and strength of parts of machinery;
stresses, rate of delivery of elevators, etc., gauges, tables of areas
and circumferences, squares, cubes, fourth and fifth powers and roots,
and items which can be indicated only by viewing them in detail. It is
a valuable and indispensable companion for the mechanical engineer. The
Macmillan Company. Price, $1.75.

       *       *       *       *       *

_M. J. Costantin_ conceives that science consists in something more
than the mere accumulation, description, and classification of facts,
with which too many persons confound it, and that the important thing
is what the facts teach, and, as related to it or as what may help to
find it out, the theories that may be deduced from them. He applies
this principle to the evolution of plant life in his book _Les Végétaux
et les Milieux Cosmiques_ (Plants and Cosmic Media)--adaptative
evolution, which is essentially a study of the operation of the various
material factors of the environment on growth and development. "Guided
by Goethe's ideas, he invites us to witness the incessant variations
of organized existence everywhere visible in Nature," under the
influence of cold and heat, light, gravity, and the aquatic medium,
hoping in these studies to find new and decisive arguments in favor of
transformist conceptions. He aims to show how the new characteristics
produced by changes in the influence of these factors to which
plants are subjected may be fixed and gradually become hereditary.
(Published by Félix Alcan, Paris, in the _Bibliothèque Scientifique
Internationale_.)

       *       *       *       *       *

Mr. _A. G. Elliot's_ little work on _Industrial Electricity_--a
translation and adaptation from the French of Henry D. Graffigny--is the
first and introductory volume of an electro-mechanical series published
by Whittaker & Co., London, and the Macmillan Company, New York. The
editor, in introducing the volumes, expresses the belief that there is
room for them because they explain in very clear and non-mathematical
language the many and various applications of electricity. Many thousand
copies of the original French editions have been sold. The present
volume is divided into short chapters, each dealing with a separate
branch of practical electricity-its nature, the units, magnetism and
induction, practical measurement, chemical generators, accumulators,
dynamo-electric machinery, electric light, electricity as a motive
power, electric chemistry and electro-plating, bells and telephones, and
telegraphs. In the succeeding volumes of the series the more important
branches of the subjects touched upon here will be treated separately
and in detail.

       *       *       *       *       *

_Franklin Story Conant_ was born in Boston in 1870; was educated in the
public schools of New England, at the University of South Carolina, and
at Williams College; and was a Doctor of Philosophy, Fellow, and Adam
T. Bruce Fellow in Johns Hopkins University. He showed great appetency
for biological investigation and devoted himself to it, at Baltimore,
Beaufort, N. C., Wood's Hole, and in Jamaica. He published a few papers
of mark, and would have published many more if he had lived. He went
to Jamaica in June, 1897, to continue his investigations, and worked
for nearly three months on the development and on the physiology of the
sense organs of the _Cubomedusæ_. After the death of the director of
the expedition, Dr. J. E. Humphrey, he took the burden upon himself, and
labored faithfully till he contracted yellow fever; returned to Boston,
and died there September 13, 1897. His associates of Johns Hopkins
University have published as a memorial volume of him his dissertation
on _The Cubomedusæ_, which he presented at the examination for the
degree of Doctor of Philosophy in June, 1897, accompanied by a brief
notice of his life and a portrait.

       *       *       *       *       *

_Frederick H. Ripley_ and _Thomas Tapper_, authors of the Natural Music
Course, have arranged _A Short Course in Music_, consisting of two
books, for use in schools in which the more complete course is deemed
unnecessary or impracticable. In both books familiar songs are made the
basis of elementary music instruction. In these songs the compositions
of the best song writers are represented. Exercises in two and three
parts in simple form are included in the course. A brief summary of
elementary theory is inserted in the appendix. Few definitions are
given, the thought of the learner being so directed as to render them
either unnecessary or obvious. In the cultivation of tone and expression
the authors insist that it is the mind rather than the vocal organs that
at first needs attention. "If the pupil hears the ideal tone he will
almost instinctively imitate it." A number of portraits of composers are
given in connection with the songs. (American Book Company. Price, 35
cents.)

       *       *       *       *       *

Mr. _Alfred Still_, believing that there was still room for a small
book in which the principles determining the behavior of single-phase
alternating currents under various conditions should be considered less
from the point of view of the man of science than from that of the
engineer, offers _Alternating Currents of Electricity and the Theory of
Transformers_ for the place. The book has been written, not only for
engineering students, but also for those engineers who, while having
extensive practical knowledge of the subject, are yet anxious to get a
correct elementary idea of the leading principles involved. Graphical
methods are used throughout, and the introduction of mathematics has
been carefully avoided. (Published by Whittaker & Co., London; The
Macmillan Company, New York. Price, $1.50.)

       *       *       *       *       *

A paper by _A. B. Stickney_, president of the Chicago Great Western
Railway Company, on _The Currency Problems of the United States in
1897-'98_, takes the ground that currency is the creature of commerce;
that legislation has nothing to do with it; that its problems are purely
economical; and that the only thing that can be done for it is to
improve the machinery of exchanges.

       *       *       *       *       *

A valuable and useful publication is New York _State Library Bulletin,
Legislation, No. 9_, containing a summary of legislation by States in
1897. This is the eighth annual number of the series, and its purpose is
to show at a glance what laws have been passed by States on any subject,
except those of purely local interest. The summaries, though concise,
so well cover the principal points of the laws cited that consultation
of the text of the laws may often be dispensed with. Constitutional
amendments receive special treatment. The references in the present
bulletin cover thirty-six States and three Territories.

       *       *       *       *       *

Two memoirs, published under one cover by the Peabody Institute of
American Archæology and Ethnology, relate to explorations by _George
Byron Gordon_ in two districts of Honduras, affording relics different
in character. The work at the ruins of Copan having been suspended
during 1896 and 1897 by some act of the Government of Honduras, Mr.
Gordon had to turn his attention elsewhere, to explorations the
results of which are given under the titles of _Researches in the Uloa
Valley_ and _Caverns of Copan, Honduras_. The investigations in the
Uloa Valley afforded a rich fund of objects of interest and of novel
character--pottery adorned with elaborate and remarkably artistic
designs, stone images, whistles, terra-cotta stamps, and only one idol.
Human remains, of the most meager description, in connection with the
pottery furnish reasonable evidence of burial places, but, being only
crumbling fragments of bone, are too minute to supply any information
respecting the form of burials or the relative position of the objects
associated with them. The conclusions are drawn that the valley was
at one time well populated, but not for any length of time occupied
by the people whose ruined buildings of stone are found in the region
up to southern Mexico, and that it was visited by several distinct
peoples in ancient times. Some mounds covered with stone were discovered
which deserve further investigation. Five caves of different size and
character, described in the second memoir, were explored near Copan,
and afforded objects peculiar to themselves and evidences of sepulture.
They were very dusty, although stalactites had formed in some of them,
and, although undoubtedly used by man many centuries ago, they do not
seem to indicate a constant occupation for an extended period of time,
or to furnish evidence of an extreme antiquity of man in the region.
The most striking feature about them is probably the entire difference
in character of the pottery from that found at Copan, only a few miles
away, and its want of resemblance with the pottery of any other locality
with which the author is familiar.

       *       *       *       *       *

A series of Bulletins, _Some Miscellaneous Results of the Work of the
Division of Entomology_, of the United States Department of Agriculture,
is intended to furnish such material as was formerly published in Insect
Life, presenting the results of observations made in the office of the
bureau which are not extensive enough upon any one topic to form an
independent and complete bulletin. The second number contains notices by
different authors, mostly connected with the bureau, on twelve insects
predatory on economical plants, with numerous "general notes" and
correspondence.

       *       *       *       *       *

_Under the Stars, and Other Verses_, is a small collection of ballads,
relating chiefly to naval fights, by _Wallace Rice_ and _Barrett
Eastman_, published by Way & Williams, Chicago. It is dedicated "to
the wider patriotism," and appears well adapted to inflame the martial
spirit, which is in this country already excited to an extremely
unhealthy extent.


PUBLICATIONS RECEIVED.

Agricultural Experiment Stations. Bulletins and Reports. Cornell
University: No. 150. Tuberculosis in Cattle and its Control. By James
Law. Pp. 30; No. 151: Gravity or Dilution Separators. By H. H. Wing.
Pp. 12--Purdue University: No. 72. Field Experiments with Wheat. Pp.
12.--United States Department of Agriculture. Biological: No. 9. Cuckoos
and Shrikes in their Relation to Agriculture. By F. E. L. Beal and S. D.
Judd. Pp. 26: No. 10. Life Zones and Crop Zones of the United States. By
C. Hart Merriam. Pp. 79; No. 11. The Geographic Distribution of Cereals
in North America. By C. S. Plumb. Pp. 24; Botany: No. 20. Principal
Poisonous Plants in the United States. By V. K. Chesnut. Pp. 60.

Alexander, Archibald. Theories of the Will in the History of Philosophy.
New York: Charles Scribner's Sons. Pp. 353. $1.50.

Allen, Alfred H., and Leffmann, Henry. Commercial Organic Analysis.
Third edition. Vol. I. Philadelphia: Blakiston's Son & Co. Pp. 557.
$4.50.

Babbler, The. Semimonthly. June and July, 1898. New York: E. Rock, 406
Fourth Avenue. Pp. 8. 10 cents. $2 a year.

Baillière, J. B., et Fils, 19 Rue Hautefeuille, Paris. Revue
Mensuelle de Bibliographie Scientifique (Monthly Review of Scientific
Bibliography), August, 1898. Pp. 20.

Carter, J. M. G. Advances in the Domain of Preventive Medicine.
Waukegan, Ill. Pp. 13.

Chemical Publishing Company, Easton, Pa. Catalogue. Pp. 26.

Columbia University Bulletin, June, 1898. Pp. 102, with plate.

Creighton, J. E. An Introductory Logic. New York: The Macmillan Company.
Pp. 392. $1.10.

Drake, N. F. A Geological Reconnaissance of the Coal Fields of the
Indian Territory. Leland Stanford, Jr., University, Palo Alto, Cal. Pp.
96.

Fitz-Maurice-Kelly, James. A History of Spanish Literature. New York: D.
Appleton and Company. (Literature of the World Series.) Pp. 423. $1.50.

Holden, Edward S. The Earth and Sky. A Primer of Astronomy for Young
Readers. (Appletons' Home-Reading Series.) New York: D. Appleton and
Company. Pp. 76, with plates. 28 cents.

Hering, Rudolph, New York. Dilution Process of Sewage Disposal. Pp.
9.--Bacterial Processes of Sewage Disposal. Pp. 14.

Industrialist, The. Ten times a year. June, 1898. Kansas State
Agricultural College, Manhattan. Pp. 80. $1 a year.

Iowa Geological Survey, Vol. VIII. Annual Report for 1897, etc. Samuel
Calvin, State Geologist. Pp.427.

Japan-American Commercial Journal. Monthly. Tokyo (Japan) Commercial and
Industrial Association. (English and Japanese.) Pp. 80.

Jordan, David Starr. Lest we Forget (address to graduating class). Pp.
36.--Description of a Species of Fish (Mitsukurina owsteni) from Japan,
the Type of a Distinct Family of Lamnoid Sharks. Pp. 8, with plates.

Kindergarten. The, Review. Monthly. Springfield, Mass.: Milton Bradley
Company. Pp. 64. $2 a year.

Lambert, P. A. Differential and Integral Calculus; for Technical Schools
and College. New York: The Macmillan Company. Pp.245. $1.50.

Luce, W. B., Hingham Centre, Mass. Kites and Experiments in Aërial
Photography. Pp.32. 25 cents.

MacCurdy, George Grant, and Mohiliansky, Nicolas. Indices Ponderaux du
Crane (Weight Indices of the Brain). Paris. Pp. 16.

MacClure, Theodore R. A Quarter-Century of Public Health Work in
Michigan. Lansing. Pp. 48.

Mivart, St. George. The Groundwork of Science. A Study of Epistemology.
New York: G. P. Putnam's Sons. Pp.328. $1.75.

Musick, John R. Lights and Shadows of our War with Spain. New York: J.
S. Ogilvie Publishing Company. Pp. 224.

Muter, John. A Short Manual of Analytical Chemistry, Qualitative
and Quantitative--Inorganic and Organic. Second American edition.
Philadelphia: Blakiston's Son & Co. Pp. 228. $1.25.

New Jersey, Geological Survey of. Annual Report of the State Geologist
for 1897. Pp. 368.

New World, The. A Quarterly Review of Religion, Ethics, and Theology.
September, 1898. Boston: Houghton, Mifflin & Co. Pp. 200. 75 cents. $3 a
year.

New York State College of Forestry at Cornell University. Announcement.
Pp. 40.

Shufeldt, Dr. R. W. On the Alternation of Sex in a Brood of Young
Sparrowhawks. Pp. 4.

Smith. William B. Infinitesimal Analysis. Vol. I. Elementary; Real
Variables. New York. The Macmillan Company. Pp. 852. $3.25.

Thomson, J. J. The Discharge of Electricity through Gases. New York:
Charles Scribner's Sons. Pp.203. $1.

University of Tennessee Record. Knoxville. Pp.80.

Venable, F. P., and Howe, J. L. Inorganic Chemistry according to the
Periodic Law. Easton, Pa.: The Chemical Publishing Company. Pp.266.
$1.50.

Wilson, L. L. W. History Reader for Elementary Schools. New York: The
Macmillan Company. Pp. 403. 60 cents.

Wright, Mabel Osgood, and Chapman, Frank M. Four-footed Americans and
their Kin. New York: The Macmillan Company. Pp. 432. $1.50.

FOOTNOTES:

[15] Practical Plant Physiology. An Introduction to Original Research
for Students and Teachers of Natural Science, Medicine, Agriculture, and
Forestry. By Dr. W. Detmer. Translated from the second German edition
by S. A. Moor. London: Swan, Sonnenschein & Co. New York: The Macmillan
Company. Pp. 555. Price, $3.

[16] The Sphere of Science. By Frank Sargent Hoffman, Ph. D. New York:
G. P. Putnam's Sons. Pp. 268. Price, $1.50.

[17] A Text-Book of Geodetic Astronomy. By John F. Hayford. New York:
John Wiley & Sons. Pp. 851, with plates.

[18] L'Année Psychologique. Edited by Alfred Binet--with the
Collaboration of H. Beaunis, Th. Ribot and Bourdon, Courtier, Farrand,
Flournoy, Philippe, Vaschide, and Warren. Editorial secretary, Victor
Henri. Fourth year. Paris: Librairie C. Reinwald. Schleicher Brothers,
publishers. Pp 849. Price, 15 francs.

[19] Introduction to the Study of North American Archæology. By Prof.
Cyrus Thomas. Cincinnati: The Robert Clarke Company. Pp. 891.

[20] Handbook of Nature Study for Teachers and Pupils in Elementary
Schools. By D. Lange. New York: The Macmillan Company. Pp. 339. Price,
$1.

[21] The State: Elements of Historical and Practical Politics. By
Woodrow Wilson. Revised edition. Boston: D. C. Heath & Co. Pp. 656.
Price, $2.

[22] How to Name the Birds. A Pocket Guide to the Land Birds and to the
Principal Water Fowl normally found in the New England States, New York,
Pennsylvania, and New Jersey, for the Use of Field Ornithologists. By H.
E. Parkhurst. New York: Charles Scribner's Sons. Pp. 115. Price, $1.




Fragments of Science.


=Carbonic Acid and Glaciation.=--In a paper on Hypotheses bearing on
Climatic Changes, Prof. T. C. Chamberlin takes up a suggestion of
Tyndall's that the periods of terrestrial glaciation might be dependent
upon the carbon dioxide of the atmosphere, the peculiar competence
of which to retain solar heat he had demonstrated. Following out the
doctrine of atmospheric loss on its own lines, although only in a
tentative way as yet, he seems to find a rhythmical action that may in
part explain the glacial oscillations. The idea, he says, hinges on
the action of the ocean as a reservoir of carbon dioxide, and on the
losses of the organic cycle under the influence of cold. Cold water
absorbs more carbon dioxide than warm water. As the atmosphere becomes
impoverished and the temperature declines, the capacity of the ocean
to take up carbonic acid in solution increases. Instead, therefore, of
resupplying the atmosphere in the stress of its impoverishment, the
ocean withholds its carbon dioxide to a certain extent, and possibly
even turns robber itself by greater absorption. So also, with increased
cold the progress of organic decay becomes less active, a greater part
of the vegetal and animal matter remains undecomposed, and its carbon
is thereby locked up; and hence the loss of carbon dioxide through the
organic cycle is increased. The impoverishment of the atmosphere is
thus hastened and the epoch of cold is precipitated. With the spread
of glaciation the main crystalline areas whose alteration is the chief
source of depletion become covered and frozen, and the abstraction of
carbon dioxide by rock alteration is checked. The supply continuing the
same, by hypothesis, re-enrichment begins, and when it has sufficiently
advanced warmth returns. With returning warmth the ocean gives up its
carbon dioxide more freely, the accumulated organic products decay
and add their contribution of carbonic acid, and the re-enrichment is
accelerated and interglacial mildness is hastened.

=Additions to the Missouri Botanical Garden.=--We learn from the
ninth annual report of the Missouri Botanical Garden that while the
decorative features were maintained in 1897 in about the same manner as
heretofore, considerable additions have been made in certain classes,
especially orchids, and the collections of cultivated species, with
their named varieties, are now estimated to number about five thousand.
Circumstances made possible material additions to the contents of the
herbarium; and, besides the purchased current collections, rather
larger and more numerous than usual, the garden has secured the
herbarium of the late J. H. Redfield, very rich in earlier collections
representing the flora of the United States; the herbarium of the late
Dr. J. F. Joor, containing 4,133 specimens, and largely adding to the
representation of the flora of Louisiana and Texas; the interesting
herbarium of Gustav Jermy, of San Antonio, Texas, containing a very
full set of Carpathian plants and a nearly complete local flora; the
important pre-Linnæan herbarium formed by Boehmer and Ludwig; and a
Chinese collection by Dr. A. Henry. Even larger additions were made to
the library. The instruction of garden pupils was continued, and the
garden was visited by several research students. Among the scientific
papers accompanying the report and bound with it are those of C. H.
Thompson on American Lemnaceæ; N. N. Glatfelter on _Salix longipes_; H.
C. Irish on the Genus Capsicum; A. S. Hitchcock on Cryptogams collected
in the Bahamas, Jamaica, and Grand Cayman; J. N. Rose on Agaves; C. H.
Thompson on Cacti Anhalonium; and seven shorter papers under the heading
of "Notes and Observations."

=The Indian Idea of the "Midmost Self."=--In attempting to explain
the significance of a pentagonal stone dodecahedron with vestiges of
figures on it found near Marietta, Ohio, Dr. J. C. Morris assumed
that, besides the Aryan idea of three dimensions of space, there is,
to the Indian and to the Eastern mind, another--the fullness. "It is
not the length and breadth and thickness of a cube, for instance, but
the whole of it, which is as much to be considered as any one of its
sides. A cube would therefore be represented numerically by seven, a
dodecahedron by thirteen. Among the Mexicans the thirteen lunar months
would thus correspond in the year with the twelve zodiacal signs and
the earth which passed under and embraced them all." Again, the five
digits came to be a measure of man's power or individuality, and thus
a sacred number. A pentagonal dodecahedron, then, might be the emblem
of the world; and the best time to be active in some contemplated
pursuit might be shown by the zodiacal sign that came uppermost when
the dodecahedron was thrown or rolled with appropriate ceremonies.
As Mr. Frank H. Cushing interpreted the doctrine at the same meeting
of the Anthropological Society, when the primitive man contemplates
or considers himself or anything in its relation to space or the
surrounding directions, "he notices that there is ever a front or face,
a rear or back; two sides, or a right and a left; a head and a foot, or
an above and a below; and that of and within all of these is himself
or it; that the essence of all these aspects in anything is the thing
itself--that is, the thing that contains their numbers or sum, yet is
one by itself. This is indeed the very key to his conception of himself
and of anything in relation to space and the universe or cosmos. He
observes that there are as many regions in the world as there are
aspects of himself or sides to any equally separate thing; that there
are as many directions from him or his place in the world (which is his
'midmost' or place of attachment to the Earth-mother), or from anything
in the world (which is its midmost or natural station), toward these
corresponding regions. Hence to him a plane would be symbolized not by
four, but by five--its four sides and directions thence, and its central
self--as was actually the notion of the prairie tribes; a cube, not by
six, but by seven, as was the notion of the valley Pueblos and Navajos;
a dodecahedron, not by twelve, but by thirteen, as was the notion of
the Zuñis, the Aztecs, and apparently--from this example--of the mound
builders as well."

=The Bactrian Camel for the Klondike.=--The great Siberian or Bactrian
camel is recommended by Mr. Carl Hagenbeck, the famous Hamburg importer
of wild beasts, as the best animal for the Klondike climate. It is at
home in the coldest regions, can carry or go in harness, can cross
mountains or traverse valleys, and is so easily supplied that Mr.
Hagenbeck can undertake to deliver any number in New York, duty paid,
for three hundred dollars each. It can endure thirst and long spells of
hunger as well as freezing cold, and is not too delicate to make its bed
on the snow. It sheds its coat before the summer heat, but as the cooler
weather of the fall comes on "it grows a garment of fur almost as thick
as a buffalo robe and equally cold-resisting. It is far more strongly
built than the southern camel. It does not 'split' when on slippery
ground, though it falls on moist, wet clay which yields to the foot. On
ice and frozen snow it stands firmly, and can travel far." It is said
that an excellent cross can be made between the male Bactrian and the
female Arabian camel; but when the parentage is reversed the progeny is
useless. General Harlan is said to have marched two thousand Bactrian
camels four hundred miles and crossed the Indian Caucasus in ice and
snow, with the loss of only one animal, and that by an accident. This
camel is native to the high plateaus, steppes, and deserts of Mongolia
and South Siberia, and it has been found wild on the plain of Tsaidam,
maintaining itself in this "arid, cold, and waterless region, where
the herds are said to travel seventy miles to drink. Nothing," we are
further told, "but too much comfort or a damp climate seems to hurt it.
For food it prefers dry, salty plants and bushes and grows sick and lean
on good pasture. The salty efflorescence of the steppes is eagerly eaten
by it, and in this country it prefers dry food, especially wheat straw
and hay. Prjevalski's camels would eat almost anything--straw, bleached
bones, old pack saddles, straps, and leather. The Mongols told him of
camels which had been without food a long time, and then devoured an old
tent belonging to their owner. They even ate meat and fish, and one of
the traveler's camels made a meal of the bird skins ready for stuffing."

=Nicaragua and its Ferns.=--Tropical America is described by B. Shimek,
in a paper on the Ferns of Nicaragua, as the fern paradise of the
earth. "No other corresponding division of the earth's surface," he
says, "presents as great a total number of species, or as many species
which are peculiar to it. Nowhere else is the great variation in form
and size, in structural characters and habits of growth, and in the
arrangement and character of the reproductive organs, better shown than
here. This richness in the fern flora, exhibited in almost unlimited
variety, is, no doubt, accounted for by the topography and contour of
that part of the American continent which lies within the tropics. It
is narrow when compared with the continents of the Old World, and it
contains high mountain chains, which form its longest axis. Its narrow
form brings all of it more or less within the influence of the adjacent
oceans, which furnish to most of it an abundance of moisture. Its high
mountains supply all the conditions effected by altitude, and, moreover,
cut off the otherwise abundant moisture from certain areas. We have
thus within comparatively restricted limits all the possible degrees of
moisture and temperature, and the effect of environment finds abundant
expression in the great variety of fern structures." After palms, ferns
form the most conspicuous feature of tropical vegetation, and in size
they vary from species only a fraction of an inch high to splendid
tree ferns or vines single fronds of which are more than thirty feet
long. In texture "some rival the flimsiest lace, while others develop
thick, leathery fronds.... In habit the variation is fully as great. In
western Nicaragua, for example, where there is a distinct dry season,
ferns growing on bare volcanic rock become so dry that they may be
ground to powder between the fingers, and yet they retain life; while
in the eastern part, with its deep jungles in which perpetual shade and
moisture prevail, the more delicate as well as the more gorgeous forms
have full opportunity for the development of their many peculiarities."
In a very small territory of Nicaragua, including a strip along the San
Juan River in no case extending more than six miles away from it, and in
the little island of Ometepe in Lake Nicaragua, Mr. Shimek, in less than
four months, while engaged in general botanical work, collected more
than a hundred and twenty species of ferns; and yet only about one fifth
of one hundred and twenty-one species recorded by Fournier, two fifths
of one hundred and thirty-five species credited by Hemsley to Nicaragua,
and two fifths of those reported by Baker and Hemsley from adjacent
Costa Rica, occur in his list.

=Wave Length and other Measurements.=--Describing the measurement of
absolute wave length before the Astronomical and Physical Society of
Toronto, Mr. A. F. Miller remarked that a somewhat incorrect idea
prevailed as to the smallness of the space occupied in the performance
of luminous undulations; in fact, some people seem to regard the wave
length of light as something almost inconceivably small. Really,
however, we are familiar with much smaller dimensions. For instance,
the author had found from actual measures that the wave length of one
of the characteristic lines in the spectrum of sodium vapor was very
nearly equal to 1/42000 of an inch. The thickness of ordinary gold leaf
is given as 1/282000 of an inch, from which it becomes evident that the
wave length of sodium light, which is an average wave length for the
visible spectrum, is six and a half times as great as the thickness
of gold leaf. Such a dimension as 1/42000 of an inch could readily be
measured by a suitable micrometer; but of course the waves of light, as
well as the ether particles by which they are transmitted, are entirely
invisible, and even were this otherwise the frequency of the undulations
is so inconceivably great that the actual phenomena of the movements
could never become perceptible. In measuring the absolute wave length,
therefore, we are forced to take the indirect method of observing the
results of undulations in cases where, by a suitable arrangement of the
experiment, equal and opposite phases of vibration are made to arrive
simultaneously at the same spot, so producing phenomena of interference.

=The "Causses" of Southern France.=--It is surprising to find existing,
in a country so old and supposedly so familiar as France, a region
similar to our Colorado plateau, full of cañons, caves, and cliff
dwellings, until recently almost unknown and wholly unexplored. Yet
such is the region of the Causses, described and illustrated with a
striking series of lantern views, before the American Association for
the Advancement of Science, by the well-known cave explorer, Dr. H.
C. Hovey, of Newburyport, Mass. The local name Causse, derived from
the Latin calx, lime, is applied to a limestone area, and here to a
limestone plateau. Along the western slope of the Cévennes Mountains
lies an elevated table-land, chiefly of Jurassic limestones, which
had been cut and carved by the streams, especially the Tarn and its
affluents, into a group of high plateaus separated by deep cañons. The
cliffs of the Tarn Valley are from one to two thousand feet and even
more in height, and with their precipitous sides and the brilliant and
varied coloring of their strata are not unworthy of comparison with our
own great cañon regions of the West. At some points, where the beds are
markedly unequal in hardness, the weathering process has resulted in
structures as remarkable as Monument Park or the Garden of the Gods.
Such is the "rock city" known as Montpellier-le-Vieux, at the junction
of the Jonté and the Durbais, on the Causse Noir. This strange area of
natural ruins covers some two thousand acres with a fantastic similitude
of castles, palaces, streets, and temples. It seems surprising that
a country so picturesque for the tourist and so interesting for the
geologist should have remained almost unknown till the present time.
Fine roads pass over and around it, but they avoid the wild and rugged
portions that possess such scenic interest, and leave the Causses--as
they have been for ages--barren solitudes, occupied only by shepherds
with their huts and flocks. The people, also, as is so often the case
in such regions, have a superstitious dread of the deeper caverns and
the seeming ruins, and do not lend themselves readily to exploration.
The cliffs are full of caves, some of which--the more accessible and
simple--are used as sheepfolds, and even in some cases inhabited, but
the wilder ones are held in dread. It seems that cliff dwellings are
actually still in use to some extent in this region. The French Société
de Spéléologie has now for some years been investigating the Causses
with great interest. Ere long this will become a favorite region for
tourists; but at present one must leave all ordinary facilities of
travel and take to canoes and mules. This was done by Dr. Hovey and
his party, under the leadership of M. Edouard A. Martel, of Paris, who
has been one of the most active explorers. They entered and traversed
many remarkable caves, some never before visited, and some that have
been previously explored by M. Martel and others of the société. One of
these, known as the Baumes Chaudes, is a great triple cavern, one of
the main branches of which had yielded a large number of prehistoric
skeletons to Dr. Prunières, of Marvejol. In the third division are a
number of deep pits, locally called "wells," from forty to a hundred and
thirty feet deep; these communicate with lower passages and subterranean
streams. They are death-traps to animals, the remains of which, of many
kinds and in all stages of decomposition, accumulate at the bottom, and
are gradually covered by stalagmitic deposits. Another remarkable cave
was discovered and named after its daring and enthusiastic explorer, M.
Louis Armand, of Paris. It can only be entered by a "well" two hundred
and forty feet deep, and below this lies another of still greater
depth. The party was provided with rope ladders for use in such places;
and the intrepid investigator who essayed the descent went down, by
actual measurement, six hundred feet from the surface. He described the
stalactites as magnificent. Both from a geological and an archæological
point of view this account was of unusual interest. Dr. Hovey had many
beautiful views of the cañons and the cave openings in their walls;
while his observations, and those of the Société de Spéléologie, are
very curious as to the persistence, in this strangely overlooked region,
of conditions closely akin to what are usually called "prehistoric"
times.

=Molecular Asymmetry and Life.=--Speaking in his presidential address to
the Chemical Section of the British Association on Stereochemistry and
Vitalism, Prof. A. R. Japp expressed the conclusion that "the production
of single asymmetric compounds or their isolation from the mixture of
their enantiomorphs [or opposite forms] is, as Pasteur firmly held,
the prerogative of life. Only the living organism, with its asymmetric
tissues, or the asymmetric productions of the living organism, or the
living intelligence with its conception of asymmetry, can produce
this result. Only asymmetry can beget asymmetry. The absolute origin
of the compounds of one-sided asymmetry is a mystery as profound as
the absolute origin of life itself. The two phenomena are intimately
connected.... No fortuitous concourse of atoms, even with all eternity
for them to clash and combine in, could compass this feat of the
formation of the first optically active organic compound. Coincidence
is excluded, and every purely mechanical explanation of the phenomena
must necessarily fail. I see no escape from the conclusion that at the
moment when life first arose a directive force came into play--a force
of precisely the same character as that which enables the intelligent
operator, by the exercise of his will, to select one crystallized
enantiomorph and reject its asymmetric opposite. I would emphasize the
fact that the operation of a directive force of this nature does not
involve a violation of the law of the conservation of energy."

=Dr. Russell's Photographic Researches.=--At the recent meeting of
the British Association at Bristol, Dr. W. T. Russell gave, before
the Chemical Section, some further information regarding his recent
researches on the surprising action exerted by certain substances in
the absence of light on photographic plates. The Journal of the Society
of Arts gives some of his more striking results: "Some ordinary type, a
portion of the cover of Punch, and the wrapper of a packet of tobacco
produced strongly defined pictures; the last mentioned was particularly
interesting, inasmuch as the red ink had proved active, the blue
inactive. Strangely, writing ink (old-fashioned) is quite inactive,
and paper having writing on it in ink, even over a hundred years old,
when placed between a sheet of active material and a sensitive plate,
yielded a picture in which the writing appeared quite distinctly, white
on black, in spite of the original being in some cases indistinct;
ferrous sulphate behaves like ink. The list of materials that are
active is very long, and includes wood, which gives a picture of the
grain and knots. Many metals are active, but zinc is very active only
when bright, so that a dirty sheet of zinc rubbed with sandpaper gives
a picture of the scratches. Many alloys are also active, pewter and
fusible metal being two of them, and curiously some brasses are, while
others are not. The effective agency that passes from the material to
the sensitive plate shows peculiarities. It passes through gelatin,
gutta-percha, celluloid, collodion, wet gum arabic, and some paper,
while other paper, glass, minerals transparent to light, and many other
substances are opaque to these emanations, and some striking effects
were exhibited demonstrating the interference of these opaque substances
when interposed between an active substance and the sensitive plate. For
instance, a five-pound note placed printing downward on the sensitive
plate gave a picture of the printing inscription, but when placed under
a zinc plate with the printing toward the zinc plate it gave a picture
of the opaque paper with the water marks distinctly showing, and, what
is still more astonishing, the zinc plate, after contact with the note,
itself yielded a picture of the inscription, showing that the influence
from the ink had passed to the zinc plate. It was noteworthy that the
signature was not in writing ink. A cutting from the Times, the paper
being transparent, showed a picture of the printing on both sides;
the picture, moreover, was reversible, showing that a perfect picture
of both sides of the paper had been impressed on the one plate. This
interesting phenomenon is, however, not quite explained, but the great
amount of work he has done leads him to the provisional opinion that the
effect is due to the evolution of hydrogen peroxide."

=Scientific "Trade Hunting."=--The recent movement in England toward the
establishment by the Government of a commercial intelligence office for
the securing and diffusion of information regarding foreign trade has
given rise to considerable discussion among the English trade papers.
The business of the office is to be the gathering of general information
of interest and value to the English merchant with a foreign trade,
and especially of pointing out new ways for the extension of foreign
commerce, and calling attention to possible new markets for English
goods. A number of schemes have been proposed, among others that of
sending an expert once every year or two to the different foreign "trade
areas," for the purpose of collecting information and samples, and of
giving a trustworthy estimate of its commercial prospects; another,
that of extending the consular reports in such a manner as to compass
the same ends. There is considerable opposition to the scheme from
some branches of business, where it is held that no one is so likely
to get hold of useful information as the trader himself, and that the
publishing of such Government reports as the scheme contemplates would
result in giving the information to foreign as well as English traders,
and thus negative whatever advantage might come to the English merchant
from his individual discovery of a valuable market.

=Dr. Neufeld.=--The London Times of September 13th gives the following
account of the career of Dr. Neufeld, who has just been delivered from
captivity in Omdurman by the English forces: "Karl Neufeld studied
medicine at Leipsic University, and went early in life to Egypt,
following first his profession as a medical man and subsequently as
a merchant. At the beginning of the eighties he had a practice at
Keneh, Upper Egypt, where several Germans and also natives of his own
home saw him. Subsequently he set up as a merchant at Assouan. After
the fall of Khartoum and the firm establishment of the Mahdi's power
at Omdurman, Neufeld seems to have formed a scheme for opening up
commercial intercourse with the closed Soudan, for he equipped a caravan
with which he proceeded to Berber, which was then in the hands of Osman
Digna. The latter sent the German, whom he looked upon as a dangerous
spy, to the Khalifa Abdullahi. This was in 1886. Neufeld was condemned
to death, and was taken to the place of execution. He behaved there
so courageously, asking to be executed like a Mohammedan, instead of
suffering death by hanging, that the Khalifa was struck and respited him
under the gallows. He was taken to the general prison, with heavy chains
on his hands and feet, and treated altogether in a most abominable
manner. He was kept alive by the women, who took pity on him and fed
him, as they had done before him to Slatin. Then an endeavor was made
to utilize his knowledge. He knew nothing about founding cannon, but
he managed to manufacture powder, and he was also ordered to invent
a machine for coining money. Owing to the escape of Father Ohrwalder
and, later, of Slatin Pasha, his position became worse. He was again
manacled and threatened with having his arms and feet hacked off if
he should attempt to escape. There were many efforts to liberate him.
The Austrian Catholic mission, induced by Father Ohrwalder, Slatin
Pasha, the British Government, the German, and more especially the
Austrian, representatives at Cairo, all endeavored to further the escape
of Neufeld. He frequently received money, but he refused to escape,
as he would not accept liberty without his wife--an Abyssinian slave
presented to him by the Khalifa--and the two children whom she had borne
him. The latter would have been exposed to fearful tortures, and thus
Neufeld chose to remain a prisoner. He was active subsequently also as
an artist, and as he could draw well he was ordered to decorate the
mausoleum of the Mahdi, and this pleased the women of the Khalifa so
much that they petitioned the latter for his liberation. It is also said
that he has written Arabic books and illustrated them. The latter part
of his twelve years' detention appears to have been less onerous, as
after the escape of Slatin he had to be interpreter to the Khalifa and
translator of European newspapers which the ruler of the Soudan received
regularly. It is to the credit of the Khalifa Abdullahi that not one
of the Christian prisoners received a hurt on the approach of the
Anglo-Egyptian forces. It is expected that a narrative of his experience
in the Soudan will be shortly published by Dr. Neufeld."

=Natural Selection and Fortuitous Variation.=--The three principal
objections urged against Darwin's theory of natural selection were
stated by Prof. W. F. R. Weldon, in his presidential address to the
Section of Zoology and Physiology of the British Association, as being
that the species of animals we know fall into orderly series for the
selection of which purely fortuitous variations can not be supposed
to afford opportunity; that minute structural variations can not be
supposed to affect the death-rate so much as the theory requires they
should, while many of the characters by which species are distinguished
appear to us so small and useless that they can not be supposed to
affect the chance of survival at all; and that the process of evolution
by natural selection is so extremely slow that the time required for its
operation is longer than the extreme limit of time given by estimates of
the age of the earth. The first of these objections the speaker alleged
to be due to a misunderstanding of words; we regard as fortuitous what
we do not understand; and he proceeded to explain how what we call
chance may be shown, especially by a method developed by Professor
Pearson, to be a real and important factor. To the other two objections
Professor Weldon opposed the results of observations of his own and of
Mr. Herbert Thompson on the small shore crabs (_Carcinus mœnas_) at
Plymouth Beach. "In these crabs small changes in the size of the frontal
breadth do, under certain circumstances, affect the death-rate; and the
mean frontal breadth among this race of crabs is, in fact, changing
at a rate sufficiently rapid for all the requirements of a theory of
evolution." In conclusion, he said: "I hope I have convinced you that
the law of chance enables one to express easily and simply the frequency
of variations among animals, and I hope I have convinced you that the
action of natural selection upon such fortuitous variations can be
experimentally measured, at least in the only case in which any one has
attempted to measure it. I hope I have convinced you that the process
of evolution is sometimes so rapid that it can be observed in the space
of a very few years." The whole difficulty of natural selection, he
added, is a quantitative difficulty; and he insisted upon the need of
observations and measurements of the rates of variation.

=The Interior of Canada.=--The country between Lake St. John and James
Bay is under survey by the Department of Colonization and Mines of
Quebec, in furtherance of a scheme for a transcontinental railroad to
tap the Hudson Bay country and Lake Winnipeg. As to the commercial
advantages of a railway center established at the head of James Bay or
at the limit of tide water on the Nottaway River, Mr. O'Sullivan, the
surveyor, shows that the shore line of Hudson and James Bay, following
the east coast from the mouth of the Nottaway to the southern entrance
to Hudson Strait, measures, in a line running due north, eight hundred
miles, or about the same distance as the former point is north of the
city of Washington; and the western shore line, measured in the same
way to Rowe's Welcome, is about sixteen hundred miles, while the area
inclosed amounts to more than three hundred and fifty thousand square
miles. While Hudson Strait is blocked with ice during nine months of
the year, the bay itself is navigable from June till November, and
James Bay is generally open early in May. All the large rivers--the
Albany, Moose, Hannah, Nottaway, Rupert, Main, and Big Rivers--converge
along these shores, and the forest wealth of the thousands of miles
drained by these and lesser rivers can be concentrated at the mouth of
the Nottaway or Rupert. The land along the line from Lake St. John is
good dry land fit for settlement. The Nottaway at the crossing point is
fourteen hundred and fifty feet wide, and admits bridge spans of five
hundred feet. Thence, a direct line to Norway House, at the foot of Lake
Winnipeg, would pass through the gypsum beds on Moose River, and give
access to a vast area of rich agricultural land in the north part of the
province of Quebec. The straight line continued would strike about the
forks of the Peace and Smoky Rivers, near the center of the northwest
wheat-growing region, and thence follow the valleys of the Peace and
Skeene Rivers to the Pacific Ocean, crossing the Rocky Mountains at
a point where the summit is two thousand feet lower than that of the
Canadian Pacific Railway. As to the resources of this northwestern
country, there are, according to a Dominion official report, an area
of six hundred and fifty-six thousand square miles along the Mackenzie
River suitable for the growth of potatoes, four hundred and seven
thousand suitable for barley, and three hundred and sixteen thousand
for wheat, with a pastoral area of eight hundred and sixty thousand
square miles, two hundred and seventy-four thousand miles of which
may be regarded as arable land. "The difference in latitude makes no
corresponding difference in the climate. Flowers bloom as early in the
spring and as late in autumn at Great Slave Lake as at Winnipeg or St.
Paul and Minneapolis. The prevailing southwest or Chinook winds render
the climate along the Peace and Liard Rivers as mild and salubrious as
that of western Ontario. Wheat ripens along the Mackenzie River under
the Arctic Circle, a thousand miles farther north than Rupert House."


MINOR PARAGRAPHS.

MR. W. H. HUDDLESTON, in his presidential address to the Geological
Section of the British Association, spoke of the geology of the
southwest of England, and began with supporting the claim of Bristol,
where the association was meeting, to be regarded as the cradle of
British geology, and even more; for, he said, Devonshire, Cornwall, and
West Somerset first attracted the attention of the Ordnance Geological
Survey. "Thus it comes to pass that the region which lies between the
Bristol Channel and the English Channel claims the respect of geologists
in all parts of the world, not only as the birthplace of stratigraphical
paleontology, but also as the original home of systematic geological
survey. The city of Bristol lies on the confines of this region,
where it shades off northwestward into the Palæozoics of Wales and
northeastward into the Mesozoics of the midland counties."

A COMMITTEE of the English Society of Arts, appointed to inquire
into the matter, attribute the doubtful quality of modern paper to
"revolutionary" changes which the industry has undergone, including
the introduction of new substances of varying qualities and chemical
properties, in the working up of which there is still room for much
improvement. The committee have examined many books, as evidence,
on the question of the deterioration of paper. They distinguish
two tendencies--to disintegration and to discoloration--which are
independent but may be concurrent effects, and are notably concurrent in
papers containing mechanical wood pulp. Disintegration, which has been
brought to light in papers of all grades, is generally the result of
chemical changes in the fibers, produced by acids in the rag papers, and
by oxidation in the papers made of mechanical wood pulp. Discoloration
of ordinary cellulose papers, as distinguished from papers containing
mechanical wood pulp, is dependent upon the quality of the sizing, and
particularly the proportion of rosin in it. The committee define as the
normal standard of quality for book papers, required for publications of
permanent value, fibers not less than seventy per cent of the cotton,
flax, and hemp class, sizing not more than two per cent rosin, the paper
to be finished with the normal acidity of pure alum, and the loading to
be not more than ten per cent mineral matter.

COLONEL G. E. CHURCH, president of the Geographical Section of the
British Association, pointed out in his opening address, which was on
Argentine geography and the ancient Pampean Sea, that the drainage
area of the Plata basin was, according to Dr. Bludan, 1,198,000 square
miles, or more than two and a half times that of the Pacific slope of
the Andes. The minimum water discharge into the Plata estuary would,
every twenty-four hours, make a lake one mile square and 1,650 feet
deep. About seventy-four per cent of it would represent the flow of
the Paraná, and twenty-six per cent that of the Uruguay River. These
interlaced with the affluents of the Amazon along a line of fourteen
degrees of longitude. The author sought to show that the Plata drainage
area was, in a recent geological period, much more extensive than it is
to-day; that its extreme northern limit was in 10° 44' south latitude,
and that nearly all the waters that now unite to form the Madeira River,
the main affluent of the Amazon, once flowed southward into a Pampean
sea that penetrated north over the plains of the present Argentine
Republic to about 19° south latitude.

DR. LE NEVE FOSTER, who nearly met his death in 1897 from carbonic-oxide
poisoning while investigating a mine accident in the Isle of Man,
discussing, in his report on the disaster, the origin of the gas, points
out that although it occurs occluded in certain rocks and minerals, it
has never been found as a natural constituent of the atmosphere of the
mines. He had, therefore, to seek an artificial source, and found it in
the burning of the timber in the mine. It appeared that the combustion
of a cubic foot of larch, the wood used in the timber construction of
the Snaefell mine, gives rise to enough carbonic oxide to occupy four
hundred and seventeen feet of space at a temperature of 60° F. and a
pressure of thirty inches. Twenty-five cubic feet of timber will yield
sufficient to infect the atmosphere with one per cent of the gas all
through the mine--enough to cause almost immediate loss of consciousness
and speedy death. It is important, therefore, to avoid as much as
possible the use of combustible material in the shafts and roadways of
mines, unless they are constantly wet or damp. It is also well to have
compressed oxygen at hand for the restoration of asphyxiated persons,
and also apparatus for penetrating noxious gases.

RAFTING, similar to that which formerly distinguished the navigation of
the Ohio and Mississippi Rivers, and to that which is still employed by
the wood dealers on the great rivers of northern Russia and Siberia,
is in use among the farmers of the middle and upper courses of the
Yang-tse-Kiang as a means of getting their produce to market. They join
rafts till they have a surface of two or three acres, care being taken
not to have them too large for the river at its narrowest passages,
and on these they build veritable farmsteads, with dwelling houses,
barns, stables, and pigpens, for horses, cattle, and swine; and provide
supplies of hay, fodder, and provisions for beast and man, to last the
human and animal population of the craft during their journey of six
hundred or nine hundred miles. The men on board are not idle through
this journey, but have their stock of osier twigs and spend their time
making baskets and other articles. Arrived at one of the great river
marts, the people dispose of their animals and products, sell the
articles they have made, and find markets for the material of their
rafts with the dealers in lumber and firewood--just as the Ohio and
Mississippi boatmen used to do. Then they return home.


NOTES.

The New York School of Applied Design for Women, 200 West Twenty-third
Street, was organized for the purpose of affording to women instruction
which will enable them to earn their livelihood by the employment of
their taste and manual dexterity in the application of ornamental design
to manufacture and the arts. Besides eight elementary courses, it has
a course in historic ornament, advanced courses in the applications
of design to the manufacture of wall paper and silk, and of the
elementary instruction to the work of an architect's draughtsman, and
to illustrating and lithography; and special courses in book-cover
designing, advanced design, animal drawing for illustration, stained
glass designing, watercolor painting, and interior decoration. The
instructors are practical men from manufactories and architects'
offices. Pupils are allowed to proceed as rapidly as they master the
successive steps in the course of instruction, without having to conform
to a fixed period.

COMMUNICATING to the American Association the results of experiments in
fig-raising in California, Dr. L. O. Howard said that the trees produced
from imported Smyrna cuttings dropped most of their fruit, whence it
seemed that something was wanting. This was found to be the fertilizing
insect, _Blastophora psenes_, which inhabits the wild fig trees or
caprifigs of the Mediterranean countries, and which the fig-growers
procure by bringing down twigs of these trees from the mountains at the
fertilizing season. Artificial fertilization of figs has been tried in
California with considerable success; but it is thought that if the
caprifig and its insect can be naturalized in California, there will be
no difficulty in raising figs the equal to those of Smyrna.

DISCUSSING at the meeting of the American Association the position of
the trilobites in classification, Prof. A. S. Packard referred to the
discovery of Beecher that certain genera of them have antennæ together
with biramose legs, essentially the same for the head and trunk, and
double, so that one portion is available for swimming and the other for
crawling. He then showed that this uniformity of appendages does not
occur in the _Crustaceæ_, to which the trilobites have been referred
heretofore. For this reason, and because the young have a different form
from crustacean young, zoölogists are inclined to refer the trilobites
to a separate class and to regard them as an older, more primitive
group. From certain obvious affinities, the _Limulus_, or king crab, may
be regarded as a descendant from the trilobites.

ON Thursday, September 15th, Mr. Stanley Spencer and Dr. Berson ascended
from the Crystal Palace, near London, in a balloon inflated with pure
hydrogen to the remarkable height of twenty-seven thousand five hundred
feet, only fifteen hundred feet below the highest ascent of Coxwell
and Glaisher. Numerous scientific instruments were carried, and also
a cylinder of compressed oxygen for inhaling at great heights. It was
found necessary to use the oxygen at twenty-five thousand feet.

IN the discussion in the British Association of a communication by
Professors E. B. Roser and W. O. Atwater recording their experiments
(American) on the amount of energy supplied to and obtainable from the
human body--which are found to be equal--Prof. W. E. Ayrton, presiding,
pointed out that the energy of muscular action is probably capillary
or electrical, the human machine being more analogous to an electric
battery or motor than to a steam engine.

IN the list of officers of the American Association for 1899, published
in our last number, the name of L. O. Howard, of the Department of
Agriculture, Washington, should have appeared as permanent secretary.

THE hundredth anniversary of the invention of the voltaic or electric
pile is to be celebrated in 1899 at Como, the birthplace of Alexander
Volta, by an international electrical exhibition. A national exhibition
of the manufacture of silk--machinery, preparation, and processes--will
be held in connection with it. An international congress will also be
held for the discussion of the progress and applications of electricity.

A PRIZE of five hundred guineas is offered by the Sulphate of Ammonia
Committee, 4 Fenchurch Avenue, London, for the best essay on The Utility
of Sulphate of Ammonia in Agriculture; the committee to have entire
disposal of the selected essay, and the refusal of any of the others for
not more than fifty guineas each. The essays--in English--should be in
the hands of the committee not later than November 15, 1898.

RECENT death lists include the names, among men known to science, of
Prof. Park Merrill, chief of the Forecast Division of the Weather
Bureau, at Washington, August 8th; Dr. E. V. Aveling, late assistant
in physiology at Cambridge and professor of chemistry and physiology
at New College, a writer upon scientific topics, in London, August
4th, aged forty-seven years; M. Paul Sevret, mathematician and member
of the French Academy of Sciences, in Paris, June 24th, aged seventy
years; W. F. R. Surringer, professor of botany in the University of
Leyden, and director of the Botanical Garden and Herbarium; J. A. R.
Newlands, the discoverer of the periodic law of the chemical elements,
in Lower Clapton, London, July 29th, aged sixty-nine years; the
astronomer Romberg, who succeeded Encke at Berlin in 1864, and was
called to Pulkova in 1873, author of numerous papers in Monthly Notices
on double stars and planetary and cometary observations, at Pulkova,
July 6th, aged sixty-four years; John Hopkinson, an eminent British
electrician, president of the Institute of Electrical Engineers in
1890 and 1896, killed with his three children in an attempt to ascend
the Dent de Visivi, Alps, August 24th; Dr. H. Trimble, professor of
practical chemistry in the Philadelphia College of Pharmacy, and editor
of the American Journal of Pharmacy; M. de Windt, geologist of the
Belgian Exploring Expedition to the Congo, drowned in Lake Tanganyika,
Africa, August 9th; Dr. Paul Glan, assistant professor of physics in
the University of Berlin, aged fifty-eight years; Dr. E. J. Bonsdorf,
formerly professor of anatomy and physiology at Helsingfors, Finland,
aged eighty-eight years; Dr. Robert Zimmerman, formerly professor of
philosophy in the University of Vienna, at Salzburg, Austria, aged
seventy-seven years; M. J. M. Moniz, known by his investigations of the
natural history of Madeira, at Madeira, July 11th, aged sixty-six years;
and M. Pomel, a distinguished French mining engineer, professor of
geology and past director at the Algiers Scientific School, and author
of a number of special works, at Oran, Algeria.

       *       *       *       *       *

Transcriber's Notes:
Obvious typographical and punctuation errors were repaired.





End of Project Gutenberg's Appletons' Popular Science Monthly,, by Various

*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK APPLETONS' POPULAR SCIENCE ***

***** This file should be named 43957-0.txt or 43957-0.zip *****
This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
        http://www.gutenberg.org/4/3/9/5/43957/

Produced by Marc-André Seekamp, Greg Bergquist and the
Online Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
(This file was produced from images generously made
available by Biodiversity Heritage Library.)


Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
will be renamed.

Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
redistribution.



*** START: FULL LICENSE ***

THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK

To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at
  www.gutenberg.org/license.


Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic works

1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.

1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works.  See paragraph 1.E below.

1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.

1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
States.

1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:

1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
copied or distributed:

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org

1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
1.E.9.

1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.

1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.

1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
Gutenberg-tm License.

1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.

1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
that

- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."

- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
     License.  You must require such a user to return or
     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
     Project Gutenberg-tm works.

- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
     of receipt of the work.

- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.

1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.

1.F.

1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
your equipment.

1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.

1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
opportunities to fix the problem.

1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.

1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.

1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.


Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm

Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
people in all walks of life.

Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org


Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation

The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
number is 64-6221541.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.

The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at 809
North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887.  Email
contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the
Foundation's web site and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact

For additional contact information:
     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
     Chief Executive and Director
     gbnewby@pglaf.org

Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation

Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
status with the IRS.

The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate

While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
approach us with offers to donate.

International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.

Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
To donate, please visit:  www.gutenberg.org/donate


Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works.

Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
with anyone.  For forty years, he produced and distributed Project
Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.

Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.

Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:

     www.gutenberg.org

This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.